Toshiba Tecra M1 Users Manual 436m_fr

: Toshiba Toshiba-Tecra-M1-Users-Manual-130096 toshiba-tecra-m1-users-manual-130096 toshiba pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 426

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Toshiba Personal Computer
TECRA M1
Maintenance Manual

TOSHIBA CORPORATION
File Number 960-436

Copyright
© 2003 by Toshiba Corporation. All rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual cannot
be reproduced in any form without the prior written permission of Toshiba. No patent liability is
assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein.
Toshiba Personal Computer TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual
First edition February 2003
Disclaimer
The information presented in this manual has been reviewed and validated for accuracy. The
included set of instructions and descriptions are accurate for the TECRA M1 at the time of this
manual's production. However, succeeding computers and manuals are subject to change without
notice. Therefore, Toshiba assumes no liability for damages incurred directly or indirectly from
errors, omissions, or discrepancies between any succeeding product and this manual.
Trademarks
Intel, Intel SpeedStep and Penteium are trade marks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation
or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries/regions.
Windows and Microsoft are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Photo CD is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by TOSHIBA under license.
Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by TOSHIBA under license.

ii

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

Preface
This maintenance manual describes how to perform hardware service maintenance for the Toshiba
Personal Computer TECRA M1.
The procedures described in this manual are intended to help service technicians isolate faulty Field
Replaceable Units (FRUs) and replace them in the field.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Four types of messages are used in this manual to bring important information to your attention.
Each of these messages will be italicized and identified as shown below.
DANGER: “Danger” indicates the existence of a hazard that could result in death or
serious bodily injury, if the safety instruction is not observed.
WARNING: “Warning” indicates the existence of a hazard that could result in bodily
injury, if the safety instruction is not observed.
CAUTION: “Caution” indicates the existence of a hazard that could result in property
damage, if the safety instruction is not observed.
NOTE: “Note” contains general information that relates to your safe maintenance
service.
Improper repair of the computer may result in safety hazards. Toshiba requires service technicians
and authorized dealers or service providers to ensure the following safety precautions are adhered
to strictly.
q Be sure to fasten screws securely with the right screwdriver. If a screw is not fully fastened,
it could come loose, creating a danger of a short circuit, which could cause overheating,
smoke or fire.
q If you replace the battery pack or RTC battery, be sure to use only the same model battery
or an equivalent battery recommended by Toshiba. Installation of the wrong battery can
cause the battery to explode.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

iii

The manual is divided into the following parts:
Chapter 1

Hardware Overview describes the TECRA M1 system unit and each FRU.

Chapter 2

Troubleshooting Procedures explains how to diagnose and resolve FRU
problems.

Chapter 3

Test and Diagnostics describes how to perform test and diagnostic
operations for maintenance service.

Chapter 4

Replacement Procedures describes the removal and replacement of the
FRUs.

Appendices

The appendices describe the following:
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q

iv

Handling the LCD module
Board layout
Pin assignments
Keyboard scan/character codes
Key layout
Wiring diagrams
BIOS Rewrite Procedures
Reliability

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

Conventions
This manual uses the following formats to describe, identify, and highlight terms and operating
procedures.
Acronyms
On the first appearance and whenever necessary for clarification acronyms are enclosed in
parentheses following their definition. For example:
Read Only Memory (ROM)
Keys
Keys are used in the text to describe many operations. The key top symbol as it appears on the
keyboard is printed in boldface type.
Key operation
Some operations require you to simultaneously use two or more keys. We identify such operations
by the key top symbols separated by a plus (+) sign. For example, Ctrl + Pause (Break) means
you must hold down Ctrl and at the same time press Pause (Break). If three keys are used, hold
down the first two and at the same time press the third.
User input
Text that you are instructed to type in is shown in the boldface type below:
DISKCOPY A: B:
The display
Text generated by the computer that appears on its display is presented in the type face below:
Format complete
System transferred

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

v

vi

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

Table of Contents
Chapter 1

Hardware Overview

1.1

Features.......................................................................................................................1-1

1.2

System Unit Block Diagram..........................................................................................1-9

1.3

3.5-inch Floppy Disk Drive (USB External) ................................................................ 1-16

1.4

2.5-inch Hard Disk Drive ........................................................................................... 1-17

1.5

CD-ROM Drive ........................................................................................................ 1-19

1.6

DVD-ROM Drive...................................................................................................... 1-20

1.7

CD-RW/DVD-ROM Drive ....................................................................................... 1-22

1.8

DVD Multi Drive ....................................................................................................... 1-24

1.9

Keyboard .................................................................................................................. 1-26

1.10

TFT Color Display..................................................................................................... 1-27

1.11

Power Supply ............................................................................................................ 1-29

1.12

Batteries .................................................................................................................... 1-32

Chapter 2

Troubleshooting Procedures

2.1

Troubleshooting........................................................................................................... 2-1

2.2

Troubleshooting Flowchart........................................................................................... 2-2

2.3

Power Supply Troubleshooting..................................................................................... 2-6

2.4

System Board Troubleshooting................................................................................... 2-16

2.5

FDD Troubleshooting................................................................................................. 2-30

2.6

HDD Troubleshooting................................................................................................ 2-33

2.7

Keyboard and Touch pad Troubleshooting................................................................. 2-38

2.8

Display Troubleshooting............................................................................................. 2-41

2.9

CD-ROM Drive Troubleshooting ............................................................................... 2-43

2.10

DVD-ROM, CD-RW/DVD-ROM, and DVD Multi Drive Troubleshooting................ 2-45

2.11

Modem Troubleshooting ............................................................................................ 2-47

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

vii

2.12

LAN Troubleshooting................................................................................................ 2-49

2.13

Bluetooth Troubleshooting.......................................................................................... 2-50

2.14

Wireless LAN Troubleshooting .................................................................................. 2-54

2.15

Sound Troubleshooting............................................................................................... 2-58

2.16

SD Card Slot Troubleshooting.................................................................................... 2-61

viii

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

Chapter 3

Tests and Diagnostics

3.1

The Diagnostic Test...................................................................................................... 3-1

3.2

Executing the Diagnostic Test ....................................................................................... 3-3

3.3

Subtest Names............................................................................................................. 3-7

3.4

System Test ............................................................................................................... 3-10

3.5

Memory Test............................................................................................................. 3-13

3.6

Keyboard Test........................................................................................................... 3-15

3.7

Display Test............................................................................................................... 3-19

3.8

Floppy Disk Test ....................................................................................................... 3-23

3.9

Printer Test ................................................................................................................ 3-25

3.10

Async Test................................................................................................................. 3-27

3.11

Hard Disk Test .......................................................................................................... 3-29

3.12

Real Timer Test.......................................................................................................... 3-32

3.13

NDP Test .................................................................................................................. 3-34

3.14

Expansion Test........................................................................................................... 3-35

3.15

CD-ROM/DVD-ROM Test ...................................................................................... 3-36

3.16

Wireless LAN Test (Agere) ....................................................................................... 3-37

3.17

Wireless LAN Test (Atheros)..................................................................................... 3-42

3.18

Wireless LAN Test (Calexico) ................................................................................... 3-45

3.19

Sound/Modem Test ................................................................................................... 3-46

3.20

IEEE1394 Test .......................................................................................................... 3-50

3.21

Bluetooth Test............................................................................................................ 3-52

3.22

Error Code and Error Status Names........................................................................... 3-61

3.23

Hard Disk Test Detail Status ...................................................................................... 3-64

3.24

Head Cleaning ........................................................................................................... 3-66

3.25

Log Utilities................................................................................................................ 3-67

3.26

Running Test.............................................................................................................. 3-69

3.27

Floppy Disk Drive Utilities.......................................................................................... 3-71

3.28

System Configuration................................................................................................. 3-76

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

ix

3.29

x

SETUP ...................................................................................................................... 3-78

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

Chapter 4

Replacement Procedures

4.1

General........................................................................................................................ 4-1

4.2

Battery Pack ................................................................................................................ 4-9

4.3

Optional PC Card...................................................................................................... 4-12

4.4

Optional SD Card...................................................................................................... 4-14

4.5

HDD......................................................................................................................... 4-15

4.6

Slim Select Bay Mosule.............................................................................................. 4-20

4.7

Modem Daughter Card .............................................................................................. 4-24

4.8

CPU.......................................................................................................................... 4-27

4.9

Keyboard .................................................................................................................. 4-32

4.10

Memory Module........................................................................................................ 4-36

4.11

Sensor/Switch Board ................................................................................................. 4-38

4.12

Touch Pad................................................................................................................. 4-40

4.13

Wireless LAN Card................................................................................................... 4-44

4.14

Bluetooth Module ...................................................................................................... 4-47

4.15

Display Assembly....................................................................................................... 4-49

4.16

LED Board................................................................................................................ 4-53

4.17

Sound Board ............................................................................................................. 4-55

4.18

System Board/RTC Battery/DC-IN Jack ................................................................... 4-57

4.19

USB Board................................................................................................................ 4-62

4.20

Fan............................................................................................................................ 4-64

4.21

Display Mask............................................................................................................. 4-66

4.22

FL Inverter ................................................................................................................ 4-68

4.23

LCD Module ............................................................................................................. 4-70

4.24

Wireless LAN Antenna/Bluetooth Antenna/Display Cover/Speaker............................. 4-74

4.25

Fluorescent Lamp ...................................................................................................... 4-85

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

xi

Appendices
Appendix A

Handling the LCD Module .............................................................................. A-1

Appendix B

Board Layout...................................................................................................B-1

Appendix C

Pin Assignments.............................................................................................. C-1

Appendix D

Character Codes............................................................................................. D-1

Appendix E

Key Layout......................................................................................................E-1

Appendix F

Reliability .........................................................................................................F-1

Appendix G

BIOS Rewrite Procedures............................................................................... G-1

Appendix H

EC/KBC Rewrite Procedures ......................................................................... H-1

Appendix I

Reliability ..........................................................................................................I-1

xii

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

xiii

Chapter 1
Hardware Overview

1 Hardware Overview

1-ii

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

1 Hardware Overview

Chapter 1

Contents

1.1

Features ...................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.2

System Unit Block Diagram......................................................................................... 1-9

1.3

3.5-inch Floppy Disk Drive (USB External)................................................................ 1-16

1.4

2.5-inch Hard Disk Drive........................................................................................... 1-17

1.5

CD-ROM Drive ........................................................................................................ 1-19

1.6

DVD-ROM Drive ..................................................................................................... 1-20

1.7

CD-RW/DVD-ROM Drive....................................................................................... 1-22

1.8

DVD Multi Drive....................................................................................................... 1-24

1.9

Keyboard.................................................................................................................. 1-26

1.10

TFT Color Display..................................................................................................... 1-27
1.10.1

LCD Module ....................................................................................... 1-27

1.10.2

FL Inverter Board ................................................................................ 1-28

1.11

Power Supply ............................................................................................................ 1-29

1.12

Batteries .................................................................................................................... 1-32
1.12.1

Main Battery........................................................................................ 1-32

1.12.2

Battery Charging Control...................................................................... 1-33

1.12.3

RTC battery......................................................................................... 1-34

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

1-iii

1 Hardware Overview

Figures
Figure 1-1

Front of the computer ...................................................................................... 1-7

Figure 1-2

System unit configuration.................................................................................. 1-8

Figure 1-3

System unit block diagram................................................................................ 1-9

Figure 1-4

3.5-inch FDD (USB External)........................................................................ 1-16

Figure 1-5

2.5-inch HDD................................................................................................ 1-17

Figure 1-6

CD-ROM drive ............................................................................................. 1-19

Figure 1-7

DVD-ROM drive .......................................................................................... 1-20

Figure 1-8

CD-RW/DVD-ROM drive ............................................................................ 1-22

Figure 1-9

DVD Multi drive ............................................................................................ 1-24

Figure 1-10

Keyboard...................................................................................................... 1-26

Figure 1-11

LCD module.................................................................................................. 1-27

Tables
Table 1-1

3.5-inch FDD specifications ........................................................................... 1-16

Table 1-2

2.5-inch HDD specifications........................................................................... 1-17

Table 1-3

CD-ROM drive specifications........................................................................ 1-19

Table 1-4

DVD-ROM drive specifications ..................................................................... 1-20

Table 1-5

CD-RW/DVD-ROM drive specifications....................................................... 1-22

Table 1-6

DVD Multi drive specifications....................................................................... 1-24

Table 1-7

LCD module specifications............................................................................. 1-27

Table 1-8

FL inverter board specifications...................................................................... 1-28

Table 1-9

Power supply output rating............................................................................. 1-30

Table 1-10

Battery specifications ..................................................................................... 1-32

Table 1-11

Time required for quick charges ..................................................................... 1-33

Table 1-12

RTC battery charging/data preservation time................................................... 1-34

1-iv

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

1.1 Features
1

1 Hardware Overview

Features

1.1

Features

The Toshiba TECRA M1 Personal Computer uses extensive Large Scale Integration (LSI), and
Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor (CMOS) technology extensively to provide compact
size, minimum weight, low power usage and high reliability. This computer incorporates the
following features and benefits: The product configuration is BTO/CTO-compatible so that a
system can be designed to suit a specific purpose.
q Microprocessor
The TECRA M1 computer is equipped with an Intel Banias Processor, which incorporates a
math co-processor, a 32KB L1 cache memory and a 1MB L2 cache memory. The processor
runs with one of the following speeds:
•

Intel Banias Processor 1.30GHz (1.35V) / 1.20GHz (0.85V)

•

Intel Banias Processor 1.40GHz (1.35V) / 1.20GHz (0.85V)

•

Intel Banias Processor 1.50GHz (1.35V) / 1.20GHz (0.85V)

•

Intel Banias Processor 1.60GHz (1.35V) / 1.20GHz (0.85V)

This processor operates at 1.35V-0.8V and 100MHz bus clock. A 32KB level-1 cache
memory and a 1MB level-2 cache memory are built in.
q Chipset
The TECRA M1 is equipped with Intel Odem, Intel ICH4-M and YEBISU3S.
q Video Controller
The computer has a Trident XP4-MCM VGA controller. The internal VRAM is 32MB (64MB
is also supported.), DDR250MHz.
q Memory
Two expansion memory slots are provided to accommodate 2.5V drive PC2100 DDRSDRAM memory units with a total capacity of 2GB (2,048MB) maximum.
The following four memory modules are available.
•

128 MB (16M×16bit×4, 2.5V, SDRAM)

•

256 MB (16M×16bit×8, 2.5V, SDRAM)

•

512 MB (32M×8bit×16, 2.5V, SDRAM)

•

1,024MB (32M×16bit×8, 2.5V, SDRAM)

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

1-1

1 Hardware Overview

1.1 Features

q Built-in HDD
The computer has a 2.5-inch HDD. The following capacities are available.
•

30/40/50/60GB

q USB FDD
A 3.5-inch FDD accommodates 2HD (1.44MB) or 2DD (720KB) disks.
The FDD is connected to an external USB port.
q Slim Select Bay
A CD-ROM, DVD-ROM, CD-RW/DVD-ROM or DVD Multi drive, 2nd HDD or 2nd
Battery can be installed in the Slim Select Bay. In addition, a second HDD may be purchased as
an option for use in the system.
q CD-ROM Drive
A full-size, maximum 24-speed 640MB CD-ROM drive, contains an AT Attachment Packet
Interface (ATAPI) controller, and supports the following formats: CD-DA, CD-ROM (Mode 1,
Mode 2), CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Photo-CD (Single/multi-session), and Enhanced CD.
q DVD-ROM Drive
A full-size and runs either 12cm (4.72-inch) or 8cm (3.15-inch) DVD/CDs without an adaptor.
It plays DVDs at maximum 8-speed and reads CDs at maximum 24-speed.
q CD-RW/DVD Drive
A full-size, CD-RW/DVD drive that contains an AT Attachment Packet Interface (ATAPI)
controller. This drive reads CD-R at maximum 24-speed and reads DVD-ROM at maximum 8speed.
q DVD Multi Drive
This drive is a combination of DVD-ROM and CD-R/RW Drive. It is full-size and runs either
12cm (4.72-inch) or 8cm (3.15-inch) DVD/CDs without an adaptor. It plays DVDs at
maximum 8-speed, writes CD-R at maximum 8-speed, writes CD-RW at maximum 4-speed,
and reads CDs at maximum 24-speed.

1-2

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

1.1 Features

1 Hardware Overview

q Display
The display comes in the following three types:
•

14.1” XGA-TFT color display, resolution 1,024×768, 16M colors

•

14.1” SXGA+-TFT color display, resolution 1,400×1,050, 16M colors

In addition, a video controller and an 32/64MB VRAM enables an external monitor to display
16M colors at a resolution of 1,024×768 pixels or 256 colors at a resolution of 1,400×1,050
pixels.
q Keyboard
An-easy-to-use 85(US)/86(UK)-key keyboard provides a numeric keypad overlay for fast
numeric data entry or for cursor and page control. The keyboard also includes two keys that
have special functions in Microsoft Windows 2000/XP. It supports software that uses a
101- or 102-key enhanced keyboard.
q Batteries
The computer has two batteries: a rechargeable Lithium-Ion main battery pack and RTC battery
(that backs up the Real Time Clock and CMOS memory).
q Universal Serial Bus (USB2.0)
Three USB ports are provided. The ports comply with the USB2.0 standard, which enables
data transfer speeds 40 times faster than USB1.1 standard. USB1.1 is also supported.
q IEEE 1394 port
The computer comes with one IEEE 1394 port. It enables high-speed data transfer directly from
external devices such as digital video cameras.
q Parallel port
The parallel port enables connection of parallel printer or other parallel devices. (ECP
compatible)
q Serial port
A standard, 9-pin, serial port enables connection of such serial devices as a serial printer, mouse
or modem. A Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART) is 16550A equivalent.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

1-3

1 Hardware Overview

1.1 Features

q External monitor port
The port enables connection of an external monitor, which is recognized automatically by Video
Electronics Standards Association (VESA) Display Data Channel (DDC) 2B compatible
functions.
q PS/2 mouse/keyboard port
Either a PS/2 compatible keyboard or a PS/2 compatible mouse can be connected to the port.
q PC card slot
The PC card slot (PCMCIA) accommodates two 5mm Type II card or one Type III card. The
slot support 16-bit PC cards and Card Bus PC cards. CardBus supports 32-bit PC cards.
q SD Card
An SD Card Slot can accommodate Secure Digital flash memory cards with various capacities.
SD cards let you easily transfer data from devices, such as digital cameras and Personal Digital
Assistants, that use SD Card flash-memory.
q Docking interface port
The docking interface port enables connection of an optional Advanced Port Replicator II. It
provides additional features as follows:
•

RJ-45 LAN jack, RT11 Modem jack

•

External monitor port

•

Parallel port and Serial port

•

PS/2 Mouse port and Keyboard port

•

DC IN socket

•

Security lock slot

•

Audio line-in, line out jack

•

Two USB ports and an IEEE 1394 port

•

DVI port

q TOSHIBA Dual Pointing Device
The TOSHIBA Dual Pointing Device consists of Touch Pad and AccuPoint. The touch pad and
control buttons enable control of the on-screen pointer and scrolling of windows. The pointer
control stick, AccuPoint enables convenient control of the cuesor.

1-4

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

1.1 Features

1 Hardware Overview

q Infrared port
The infrared port is compatible with Fast InfraRed (FIR) standards enabling cableless 4 Mbps,
1.152 Mbps, 115.2 kbps, 57.6 kbps, 38.4 kbps, 19.2 kbps or 9.6 kbps data transfer with
Infrared Data Association (IrDA) 1.1 compatible external devices.
q Sound system
The sound system is equipped with the following features:
•

AC Link and AnalogDeveices AD1981A

•

AMP: AN12490 and NSCLM4911

•

Stereo speakers

•

Built-in Microphone (Mono)

•

Volume control knob

•

Stereo Headphone jack

•

External microphone jack

q Video-out jack
The video jack enables to transfer NTSC or PAL data to external devices connected with SVideo cable.
q Internal modem
The internal modem is equipped as a modem daughter card (MDC).
The internal modem provides capability for data and fax communication and supports V.90/92.
For data reception it operates at 56,000bps and for data transmission it operates at 33,600bps.
For fax transmission it operates at 14,400bps. It is also equipped with Speakerphone and TAM
(Telephony Answering Machine) function. The speed of data transfer and fax depends on analog
telephone line conditions. It has an RJ11 modem jack for connecting to a telephone line. Both of
V.90 and V.92 is supported in USA and Canada. In other regions, only V.90 is available.
q Internal LAN
The computer is equipped with LAN circuits that support Ethernet LAN (10 megabits per
second, 10BASE-T), Fast Ethernet LAN (100 megabits per second, 100 BASE-Tx) and
Gigabit Ethernet LAN (1000megabits per second, 1000BASE-T). It also supports Wakeup on
LAN (WOL) and Magic Packet.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

1-5

1 Hardware Overview

1.1 Features

q Bluetooth (BTO)
The computer is equipped with Bluetooth (V1.1) communications standards enable wireless
connection between electronic devices such as computers and printers.
q Mini PCI Card slot (1 slot, BTO)
In some models built to order (BTO), a Mini PCI Card with wireless LAN functions is available.
Wireless LAN: The Mini PCI Card for wireless LAN is compatible with other LAN systems
based on Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum radio technology that complies with the IEEE
802.11 Standard (Revision B) only, and IEEE 802.11 Standard (Revision A, B). Revision A
supports data transfer up to 54Mbit/s. Revision B supports data transfer up to 11Mbit/s. It has
Frequency Channel Selection (5GHz: Revision A/2.4GHz: Revision B) and allows roaming over
multiple channels.
q Presentation button
This button switches the display between internal display, external display, simultaneous display
and multi-monitor display.
q Brightness sensor
The Brightness sensor adjusts the brightness of LCD to the adequate brightness according to the
illuminant of the place where you are using the PC.

1-6

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

1.1 Features

1 Hardware Overview

The front of the computer is shown in figure 1-1.

Figure 1-1 Front of the computer

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

1-7

1 Hardware Overview

1.1 Features

The system unit configuration is shown in figure 1-2.

MDC

Figure 1-2 System unit configuration

1-8

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

1.2 System Unit Block Diagram

1.2

1 Hardware Overview

System Unit Block Diagram

Figure 1-3 is a block diagram of the system unit.

1.3/1.4/1.5
/1.6GHz

HDD
9.5mm
30/40/50/
60GB

Figure 1-3 System unit block diagram

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

1-9

1 Hardware Overview

1.2 System Unit Block Diagram

The system unit is composed of the following major components:
q Processor

1-10

•

Intel Banias Processor 1.30GHz
– Processor core speed: 1.30GHz (Performance Mode at 1.35V) and 1.20GHz
(Battery Optimized Mode at 0.85V)
– Processor bus speed: 400MHz
– Integrated L1 cache memory: 32KB instruction cache and 32KB write-back data
cache, 4-way set associative
– Integrated L2 cache memory: 1MB ECC protected cache data array, 8-way set
associative
– Integrated NDP

•

Intel Banias Processor 1.40GHz
– Processor core speed: 1.40GHz (Performance Mode at 1.35V) and 1.20GHz
(Battery Optimized Mode at 0.85V)
– Processor bus speed: 400MHz
– Integrated L1 cache memory: 32KB instruction cache and 32KB write-back data
cache, 4-way set associative
– Integrated L2 cache memory: 1MB ECC protected cache data array, 8-way set
associative
– Integrated NDP

•

Intel Banias Processor 1.50GHz
– Processor core speed: 1.50GHz (Performance Mode at 1.35V) and 1.20GHz
(Battery Optimized Mode at 0.85V)
– Processor bus speed: 400MHz
– Integrated L1 cache memory: 32KB instruction cache and 32KB write-back data
cache, 4-way set associative
– Integrated L2 cache memory: 1MB ECC protected cache data array, 8-way set
associative
– Integrated NDP

•

Intel Banias Processor 1.60GHz
– Processor core speed: 1.60GHz (Performance Mode at 1.35V) and 1.20GHz
(Battery Optimized Mode at 0.85V)
– Processor bus speed: 400MHz
– Integrated L1 cache memory: 32KB instruction cache and 32KB write-back data
cache, 4-way set associative

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

1.2 System Unit Block Diagram

1 Hardware Overview

– Integrated L2 cache memory: 1MB ECC protected cache data array, 8-way set
associative
– Integrated NDP
q Memory
Two BTO-compatible expansion memory slots are provided. Expansion up to 2GB (2,048MB) is
available.
•
•

•
•
•
•

DDR-SDRAM (Double Data Rate - Synchronous DRAM)
128 MB/256 MB/512 MB/1,024MB(1GB) selectable
– 128 MB (16M×16bit×4)
– 256 MB (16M×16bit×8)
– 512 MB (32M×8bit×16)
– 1,024MB (32M×16bit 8)
200 pin, SO Dual In-line Memory Modules (SO-DIMM)
2.5 volt operation
Supports DDR CL2/2.5
Supports PC2100 only

q Intel Odem (North Bridge)
•
•

One Intel 82845MP is used.
Features:
– Banias Processor System Bus Support
– DRAM Controller: DDR200/DDR266 Support, 1GB max
– Accelerated Graphics Port Interface: adheres to AGP2.0, AGP ×4 mode
– Hub Link Interface
– 593-ball 37.5×37.5 mm FC-BGA package

q Intel ICH4-M (South Bridge)
•
•

One Intel 82801LAM is used.
This gate array has the following features:
– Hub Link Interface
– PCI Rev2.2 Interface (6 PCI REQ/GNT Pairs)
– BusMaster IDE Controller (Ultra ATA 100/66/33)
– USB 1.1/2.0 Controller 6 Prots (EHCI: Enhanced Host Controller)
– I/O APIC (ACPI 1.06)
– SMBus2.0 Controller
– FWH Interface (BIOS)
– LPC Interface (EC/KBC, Super I/O)
– IRQ Controller
– Serial Interrupt Controller
– Power Management Controller

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

1-11

1 Hardware Overview

–
–
–
–
–
–

1.2 System Unit Block Diagram

Deeper Sleep (C4) Support
Suspend/Resume Control
AC'97 2.2 Interface
Internal RTC
Internal LAN Controller (WfM2.0)
421-ball 31×31mm BGA Package

q PC Card Controller Gate Array
•
•

One YEBISU3S gate array is used.
This gate array has the following functions and components.
– PCI interface (PCI Revision2.2)
– CardBus/PC Card controller (Yenta2 Version2.2)
– SD memory card controller (SDHC Ver.1.2)
– SD IO card controller (Ver.1.0)
– SmartMedia controller (SMHC Ver.01/SMIL1.0)
– SIO (UART) controller (MS Debug Port Specification Ver.1.0)
– Docking station interface
– Q switch control, reset control
– External device interface

q Firmware Hub (FWH)
•
•

•

1-12

One Intel 82802AB8 is used.
This gate array has the following features:
– Intel platform compatibility
– Firmware hub hardware interface mode
– Industry-standard packages
– Two configurable interfaces
– 4Mbits of flash memory for platform code/data nonvolatile storage
– Address/Address-Multiplexed (A/A Mux) interface/mode
– Case temperature operating range
– Vcc: 3.3V ± 0.3V
– Vpp: 3.3V and 12V for fast programming (80 hours maximum)
4Mbits of flash memory are used as shown below:
– 64KB are used for VGA-BIOS.
– 192KB are used for system BIOS.
– 8KB are used for plug and play data area.
– 8KB are used for password security.
– 16KB are used for boot strap.
– 64KB are used for ACPI P code.
– 64KB are used for LOGO.
– 64KB are reserved for LAN BIOS.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

1.2 System Unit Block Diagram

1 Hardware Overview

– 32KB are reserved.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

1-13

1 Hardware Overview

1.2 System Unit Block Diagram

q VGA Controller
One Trident XP4-MCM chip is used. The video controller incorporates graphics accelerator,
video accelerator.
• Internal VRAM, 32MB DDR 250MHz (64MB is also supported.)
• Connected to AGP bus R2.0
• LCD Interface LVDS 2ch
• TV Encoder: Tvxpress2
• DVI Supported by Dock
q Sound Controller
•
•

One AC'97Codec AD1981A chip and AC-Link controller embedded in ICH4-M
SW sound

q EC/KBC (Embedded Controller/Keyboard Controller)
• One Mitsubishi M306K 9FCLRP micon chip functions as both EC and KBC.
• EC
This controller controls the following functions:
– Power supply sequence
– Thermal conditions
– LEDs
– Beep
– Device ON/OFF
– Fan speed
– Universal I/O port
– Docker Docking Sequence
– Battery capacity check
– Forced reset
– Flash rewriting
– EC interface
– I2C communication
– EC access
– Slim Select Bay Control
•

KBC
This controller has the following functions:
– Scan controller to check status of keyboard matrix
– Interface controller between the keyboard scan controller and the system
– Control of switching and simultaneous operation of the accupoint/external PS/2
mouse and of the internal keyboard/external PS/2 keyboard

1-14

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

1.2 System Unit Block Diagram

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

1 Hardware Overview

1-15

1 Hardware Overview

1.2 System Unit Block Diagram

q PSC (Power Supply Controller)
•
•

One TMP87PM48U chip is used.
This controller controls the power sources.

q RS232 Driver
•
•

One MAXIM3243 chip is used.
This driver converts signals for interface with external equipment.

q Clock Generator
•
•

One ICS950810AG-T is used.
This device generates the system clock.

q Modem Controller
•
•

1-16

One built-in modem card with Xircom Lucent SCORPIO+CSP1037B is used.
This controller has the following functions:
– Digital line protection support
– Ring wake up support
– AC97 interface
– The following communication codes are supported
Data:
V.90 (56K bps) data communication control
V.92 (56K bps) data communication control
V.34 (33.6 K~2400)
V.32 bis (14.4K, 12K, 9600)
V.22 bis (2400, 1200)
V.22 (1200)
V.23 (1200, 600, 75)
V.21 (300)
Fax:
V.17 (14.4K, 12K, 9600, 7200)
V.29 (9600, 7200, 4800)
V.27 ter (4800, 2400)
V.21 ch2 (300)

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

1.2 System Unit Block Diagram

1 Hardware Overview

q Internal LAN Controller
•
•
•

One MAC incorporated with ICH4-M and PHY (Kinnereth-R 182562EP or Kenai32N)
are used for the internal chip, and are connected with RJ11/RJ45 combo connector.
This controller has the following functions:
Full Duplex support at 10 Mbps/100 Mbps
– WOL support
– Magic Packet Support

q Wireless LAN
•

One Mini PCI card for LAN with TI card bus controller, TI 1410 is used.

q Super I/O
•
•

One LPC 47N227 chip is used.
This gate array has the following features:
– Floppy Disk Controller
– Serial Port Controller
– Infrared Communications Controller
– Parallel Port Controller

q IEEE1394
•

One TSB43AB22 is used.

q Sensor
•
•
•

Thermal Sensor: One ADM1032AR chip is used.
LCD Sensor: One NRS-701-1015T chip is used.
Light Sensor: One TSL2550 chip is used.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

1-17

1 Hardware Overview

1.3

1.3 3.5-inch Floppy Disk Drive (USB External)

3.5-inch Floppy Disk Drive (USB External)

The 3.5-inch FDD is a thin, high-performance reliable drive that supports 720KB (formatted) 2DD,
1.2MB (formatted) and 1.44MB (formatted) 2HD disks.
The FDD is shown in figure 1-4. The specifications for the FDD are listed in Table 1-1.

Figure 1-4 3.5-inch FDD (USB External)

Table 1-1 3.5-inch FDD specifications
Items
Data transfer
rate

FDD part
USB

Disk rotation speed
Track density

1-18

720KB mode

1.2MB mode

250K bits/second

1.44MB mode

500K bits/second

Full speed mode (12M bits/second)
300rpm

360rpm

300rpm

5.3 track/mm (135TPI)

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

1.4 2.5-inch Hard Disk Drive

1.4

1 Hardware Overview

2.5-inch Hard Disk Drive

The removable HDD is a random access non-volatile storage device. It has a non-removable 2.5inch magnetic disk and mini-Winchester type magnetic heads.
The computer supports a 30GB, 40GB, 50GB and 60GB HDD.
The HDD is shown in figure 1-5. Specifications are listed in Table 1-2.

Figure 1-5 2.5-inch HDD

Table 1-2 2.5-inch HDD specifications (1/3)
Specifications
TOSHIBA
HDD
2181B

TOSHIBA
HDD
2171B

TOSHIBA HDD
2186B

TOSHIBA
HDD
2184B

Storage size (formatted)

30GB

40GB

50GB

60GB

Speed (RPM)

4,200

5,400

7,200

5,400

154.3 - 298.0

200.8 - 333.2

249.4 – 440.5

202.9-373.3

Items

Data transfer speed (Mbits/s)
Interface transfer rate (MB/s)

100

Storage density (Kbpi)

618

607

572

632

Track density (Ktpi)

78.9

57.1

74.0

78.9

Average random seek time
(read) (ms)
Motor startup time (ms)

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

12
4

1-19

1 Hardware Overview

1.4 2.5-inch Hard Disk Drive

Table 1-2 2.5-inch HDD specifications (2/3)
Specifications
Items

HITACHI
G8BC0000F310

HITACHI
G8BC00009110

Storage size (formatted)

30GB

40GB

Speed (RPM)

4,200

5,400

22.1 – 42.8

27.8 – 44.1

Data transfer speed (Mbits/s)
Interface transfer rate (MB/s)

100 (MAX Ultra DMA mode)

Storage desnity (Kbpi)

716

612

Track density (Ktpi)

70.0

63.0

Average random seek time
(read) (ms)

13

Motor startup time (ms)

5

Table 1-2 2.5-inch HDD specifications (3/3)
Specifications
Items

IBM
G8BC00004210

IBM
G8BC0000A110

Storage size (formatted)

30GB

40GB

Speed (RPM)

4,200

5,400

125 – 241

160 – 297

Data transfer speed (Mbits/s)
Interface transfer rate (MB/s)
Storage desnity (Kbpi)
Track density (Ktpi)

100
509

506 (MAX)
66.4

Average random seek time
(read) (ms)

12

Motor startup time (ms)

5

1-20

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

1.5 CD-ROM Drive

1.5

1 Hardware Overview

CD-ROM Drive

The CD-ROM drive accommodates either 12 cm (4.72-inch) or 8 cm (3.15-inch) CDs. They
provide high-performance, twenty-four-speed plays on a maximum (reads 3,600 KB per second).
The CD-ROM drive is shown in figure 1-6. Specifications are listed in Table 1-3.

Figure 1-6 CD-ROM drive

Table 1-3 CD-ROM drive specifications
TEAC specifications
(G8CC00005410)
24 x mode (Max.)

Item
ATAPI Burst (Mbytes/s)

33.3 (U-DMA Transfer mode 2)

Access time (ms)
Average Random Access
Average Full Stroke
Access

110 (except in Audio play mode)
240 (except in Audio play mode)

Rotation speed (rpm) (typ.)

5,136

Data Buffer Capacity (Kbytes)
Supported Format

128
CD-DA, CD-ROM Mode 1, Mode 2
CD-ROM XA Mode 2 (Form 1, Form 2)
Photo CD (Single/multi-session), Enhanced CD

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

1-21

1 Hardware Overview

1.6

1.6 DVD-ROM Drive

DVD-ROM Drive

The DVD-ROM drive accommodates either 12cm (4.72-inch) or 8cm (3.15-inch) DVDs. This
drive plays DVDs at maximum 8-speed and reads CDs at maximum 24-speed.
The DVD-ROM drive is shown in figure 1-7. Specifications for the DVD-ROM drive are
described in table 1-4.

Figure 1-7 DVD-ROM drive

Table 1-4 DVD-ROM drive specifications (1/2)
HITACHI ZA2441P03
Item
DVD-ROM mode
ATAPI Burst (Mbytes/s)
Access time (ms) (Typ.)
Rotation speed (rpm)
Data Buffer Capacity (Kbytes)
Supported Format

1-22

CD-ROM mode

33.3 (U-DMA Transfer mode 2)
90 (Single Layer)
130 (Dual Layer)

85

4,670 Max

5,100Max
512

DVD-ROM (3.95GB, 4.7GB) (Read)
CD-ROM Mode 1, Mode 2, CD-ROM XA, CD-I Digital Video,
Photo-CD Multisession, CD-Audio, Mixed mode CDROM, CD-EXTRA, CD-TEXT, CD-R, CD-RW

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

1.6 DVD-ROM Drive

1 Hardware Overview

Table 1-4 DVD-ROM drive specifications (2/2)
HITACHI G8CC00015410

Item

DVD-ROM mode
ATAPI Burst (Mbytes/s)

33.3 (U-DMA Transfer mode 2)

Access time (ms)
Average Random
Access

110 (Typ.)

Rotation speed (rpm)

85 (Typ.)

4,594 Max

Data Buffer Capacity (Kbytes)
Supported Format

CD-ROM mode

5,136Max
256

DVD-ROM, DVD-R (Read)
CD-DA, CD+(E)G, CD-MIDI, CD-TEXT
CD-ROM, CD-ROM XA, CD-I
CD-I Bridge (Photo-CD, Video-CD)
Multisession CD (Photo-CD, CD-EXTRA, CD-R, CD-RW)
CD-R (Read), CD-RW (Read)

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

1-23

1 Hardware Overview

1.7

1.7 CD-RW/DVD-ROM Drive

CD-RW/DVD-ROM Drive

The CD-RW/DVD-ROM drive accommodates either 12 cm (4.72-inch) or 8 cm (3.15-inch) CDs,
CD-R/RW and DVDs. It is a high-performance drive that reads CD-R at maximum 24-speed and
reads DVD-ROM at maximum 8-speed.
The CD-RW/DVD-ROM drive is shown in figure 1-8. Specifications are listed in Table 1-5.

Figure 1-8 CD-RW/DVD-ROM drive

Table 1-5 CD-RW/DVD-ROM drive specifications (1/3)
Specifications

Item

TEAC G8CC0000Q410
ATAPI Burst (Mbytes/s)
Average access
time (msec.)

CD-ROM

90

DVD-ROM

110

Data Buffer Capacity
Supported Formats

16.7 (Mode 0 to 2, Mode 0 to 4)
33.3 (Ultra DMA mode 2)

2MB
CD: CD-DA, CD-ROM Mode 1, Mode 2, CD-ROM XA Mode
2 (Form 1, Form 2), Photo CD (single/multi-session),
Enhanced CD, CD-TEXT
DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-Video, DVD-R (General, Authoring)
DVD-RAM (4.7GB, 2.6GB)

1-24

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

1.7 CD-RW/DVD-ROM Drive

1 Hardware Overview

Table 1-5 CD-RW/DVD-ROM drive specifications (2/3)
Specifications

Item

Panasonic G8CC00010410
ATAPI Burst (Mbytes/s)
Average access
time (msec.)

16.6 (PIO Mode 4, DMA Mode 2)
33.3 (Ultra DMA Mode2)

CD-ROM

130

DVD-ROM

180

Data Buffer Capacity

2MB

Supported Formats

CD:

CD-DA, CD-ROM, CD-ROM XA, CD-R, CD-RW
Photo CD, Video CD, CD-EXTRA (CD+), CD-TEXT

DVD: DVD-Video, DVD-ROM, DVD-R (3.9GB, 4.7GB),
DVD-RW, DVD-RAM (4.7GB)

Table 1-5 CD-RW/DVD-ROM drive specifications (3/3)
Specifications

Item

HITACHI G8CC00016410
ATAPI Burst (Mbytes/s)
Average access
time (msec.)

16.6 (PIO Mode 4, DMA MW Mode 2)
33.3 (Ultra DMA Mode2)

CD-ROM

120

DVD-ROM

110

Data Buffer Capacity
Supported Formats

2MB
CD:

CD-ROM Mode-1, CD-ROM XA, CD-Audio, Mixed
Mode CD-ROM, Photo-CD, CD-I DV, Video CD, CDPlus/CD-EXTRA, CD-TEXT, CD-R, CD-RW

DVD: DVD-ROM (single layer 4.7GB, dual layer 8.5GB)
DVD-R (3.95/4.7GB), DVD-RW (4.7GB)

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

1-25

1 Hardware Overview

1.8

1.8 DVD Multi Drive

DVD Multi Drive

The DVD Multi drive is capable of driving either 12cm (4.72-inch) or 8cm (3.15-inch) DVD and
CD without using an adaptor. This drive plays DVDs at maximum 8-speed, reads CDs at maximum
24-speed, writes CD-R at maximum 8-speed, and writes CD-RW at maximum 4-speed.
The DVD Multi drive is shown in figure 1-9. Specifications are listed in Table 1-6.

Figure 1-9 DVD Multi drive

Table 1-6 DVD Multi drive specifications (1/2)
Panasonic G8CC00012410
Item
DVD-ROM mode
ATAPI Burst (Mbytes/s)

CD-R/CD-RW
(Write)

CD-ROM mode
33.3 (Ultra DMA mode 2)

16.6 (PIO Mode 4, Multi-word DMA mode 2)
Access time (ms)
1/3 Stroke Access (typ.)
Data Buffer Capacity (Mbytes)
Supported Format

180

130

-

2
CD: CD-DA, CD-ROM, CD-R/W, CD-R,
CD-ROM XA (except ADPCM), CD-I
Ready, Photo CD (Multi session),
Video CD, CD-EXTRA (CD+), CDTEXT

CD-R, CD-RW

DVD: DVD-VIDEO, DVD-ROM, DVD-R
(3.9GB, 4.7GB), DVD-RW (Ver.1.1),
DVD-RAM

1-26

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

1.8 DVD Multi Drive

1 Hardware Overview

Table 1-6 DVD Multi drive specifications (2/2)
TEAC
Item
DVD-ROM mode
ATAPI Burst (Mbytes/s)

33.3 (Ultra DMA mode 0 to 2)
16.7 (PIO Mode 0 to 4, Multi-word DMA mode 0 to 2)

Access time (ms)

110

Data Buffer Capacity (Mbytes)
Supported Format

CD-R/CD-RW
(Write)

CD-ROM mode

130

-

2MB
CD: CD-DA, CD-ROM Mode 1, CD-ROM
XA Mode 2 (Form 1, Form 2), Multisession Photo CD, CD-I, Video CD,
Enhanced CD, CD-TEXT

CD-R, CD-RW

DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R (General,
Authoring), DVD-Video, DVD-RW,
DVD-RAM (4.7GB, 2.6GB/read
only)

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

1-27

1 Hardware Overview

1.9

1.9 Keyboard

Keyboard

The keyboard is mounted 85(US)/86(UK) keys that consist of character key and control key, and
in conformity with JIS. The keyboard is connected to membrane connector on the system board
and controlled by the keyboard controller.
Figure 1-10 is a view of the keyboard.
See Appendix E about a layout of the keyboard.

Figure 1-10 Keyboard

1-28

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

1.10 TFT Color Display

1 Hardware Overview

1.10 TFT Color Display
The TFT color display consists of 14.1-inch XGA/SXGA+ LCD module and FL inverter board.
1.10.1

LCD Module

The LCD module used for the TFT color display uses a backlight as the light source and can display
a maximum of 262,144 colors with 1,024 x 768 or 1,400 x 1,050 resolution. The Trident XP4MCM can control both internal and external XGA- or SXGA+- support displays simultaneously.
Figure 1-11 shows a view of the LCD module and Table 1-7 lists the specifications.

Figure 1-11 LCD module

Table 1-7 LCD module specifications (1/2)
Item

Specifications
14.1-inch XGA TFT (VF2092P03)

Number of Dots
Dot spacing (mm)
Display range (mm)

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

1,024 (W) x 768 (H)
0.297 (H) x 0.297 (V)
285.696 (H) x 214.272 (V)

1-29

1 Hardware Overview

1.10 TFT Color Display

Table 1-7 LCD module specifications (2/2)
Specifications

Item

14.1-inch SXGA+ TFT (VF2074P01)
Number of Dots

1,400 (W) x 1,050 (H)

Dot spacing (mm)

0.204 (H) x 0.204 (V)

Display range (mm)

285.6 (H) x 214.2 (V)

1.10.2

FL Inverter Board

The FL inverter board supplies a high frequency current to illuminate the LCD module FL. Table 18 lists the FL inverter board specifications.
Table 1-8 FL inverter board specifications
Item
Input

Output

1-30

Specifications

Voltage (V)

DC 5

Power (W)

7

Voltage (V)

750

Current (mA)

6.00

Power (mA)

5W/7VA

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

1.11 Power Supply

1 Hardware Overview

1.11 Power Supply
The power supply supplies many different voltages to the system board and performs the following
functions:
1. Checks power input to determine:
•
•

Whether the AC adaptor is connected to the computer
Whether the battery pack is installed and supplying power

2. Checks power supply’s internal controls:
•
•
•
•
•

Battery pack charging: start, stop and voltage supplied to the battery pack
Power supply system: Power supplied from a DC power source (AC adaptor)
Faulty power supply: Executes forced shutdown if needed
Logic: Power supply to various circuits
Charging current to PWM control IC for battery pack charging

3. Controls the following aspects of the logic system
•
•

Power supply to gate arrays
Power on/off

4. Indicates the following:
•
•
•

DC IN (sets LED to orange or green)
Battery icon (sets LED to orange or green)
Faulty power supply by low battery

5. Interface for the following:
•
•

BIOS via EC/KBC
Function mode of power supply

6. Detects the following:
•
•
•
•

Input voltage to logic system
Input voltage, overvoltage and input/output to battery pack
Battery pack’s internal temperature
Input voltage to DC power supply (output from AC adaptor)

The power supply output rating is specified in Table 1-9.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

1-31

1 Hardware Overview

1.11 Power Supply

Table 1-9 Power supply output rating

Device

Name

DC
Volta
ge (V)

Power supplied Yes/No
Power off
Suspen
d

Power off
Boot
mode

No battery
*1)

PPV

0.748-1.468

No

No

No

1R2-P1V

1.2

No

No

No

CPU, MCH-M, ICH4-M

PTV

1.05

No

No

No

LAN Cont (82540EP)

LAN-E2V

2.5

Yes

No

No

MCH-M, DDR MEM

2R5-B2V

2.5

Yes

No

No

VGA (XP4)

2R5-P2V

2.5

No

No

No

MCH-M, DDR MEM

1R25-B1V

1.25

Yes

No

No

ICH4-M, 82540EP

LAN-E3V

3.3

Yes

No

No

PC Card Cont (Yebisu3S), PC Card,
Serial I/F

B3V

3.3

Yes

No

No

CPU Temperature Sensor (ADM1032),
Clock Generator (CK408), ICH4-M,
XP4, TV Encoder, LCD, DVI Encoder,
1394, FWH, Mini PCI, Sound Codec
(AD1981), Super I/O, SD Card, Modem,
FIR, Illumi Sensor

P3V

3.3

No

No

No

USB Port

E5V

5

Yes

No

No

PC Card

B5V

5

Yes

No

No

Dual Point, XP4, FL Inverter, Docking
I/F, KB LED, Other LED’s, HDD, Mini
PCI, Bluetooth, Cooling, Slim Select
Bay *2)

P5V

5

Yes

No

No

SND-P5V

5

No

No

No

15-EBV

10-15

Yes

No

No

CPU, MCH-M, ICH4-M

1R8-P1V

1.8

No

No

No

ICH4-M, 82540EP

_AN1R5E1V

1.5

Yes

No

No

MCH-M, ICH4-M

1R5-P1V

1.5

No

No

No

XP4

PGV

1.2-1.5

No

No

No

PSC

MCV

5

Yes

Yes

No

PS LED’s, Battery E2PROM

M5V

5

Yes

Yes

No

Pull-ups

S5V

5

Yes

Yes

No

ICH4-M, EC/KBC

S3V

3.3

Yes

Yes

No

CPU
MCH-M

AD1981, Sound Amplifer
Pull-ups

1-32

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

1.11 Power Supply

ICH4-M
ICH4-M (RTC)

1 Hardware Overview

1R5-S1V

1.5

Yes

Yes

No

R3V

3.3

Yes

Yes

Yes

*1) Both Main battery and Sub Battery are empty, and only RTC Battery is charged.
*2) CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive Unit is attached.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

1-33

1 Hardware Overview

1.12 Batteries

1.12 Batteries
The computer has three types of batteries as follows:
q

Main battery pack

q

RTC battery

q

Secondary battery pack (Optional Slim Select Bay Module)

The battery specifications are listed in Table 1-10.
Table 1-10 Battery specifications
Battery name
Main battery

9 cell

Material

Output voltage

Lithium-Ion

10.8 V

6 cell

Capacity
6,600 mAh
4,400 mAh

RTC battery

Lithium-Ion

2.4 V

30 mAh

Secondary battery pack

Lithium-Ion

10.8 V

3,000/3,600 mAh

1.12.1

Main Battery

The removable main battery pack is the computer’s main power source when the AC adaptor is not
attached. The main battery maintain the state of the computer when the computer enters in resume
mode.

1-34

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

1.12 Batteries

1.12.2

1 Hardware Overview

Battery Charging Control

Battery charging is controlled by a power supply microprocessor. The microprocessor controls
whether the charge is on or off and detects a full charge when the AC adaptor and battery are
attached to the computer. The system charges the battery using quick charge.
Quick Battery Charge
When the AC adaptor is attached, there are two types of quick charge: quick charge 1 when the
system is powered off and quick charge 2 when the system is powered on.
Table 1-11 Time required for quick charges
Status
Quick charge 1
(Power off)
Quick charge 2
(Power on)

Charging time
9 cell

About 2.8 hours

6 cell

About 2.5 hours
About 7 hours (When Windows is idling.)

9 cell
About 15 hours (When DVD is being played.)
About 5 hours (When Windows is idling.)
6 cell
About 11 hours (When DVD is being played.)

NOTE: The time required for quick charge 2 is affected by the amount of power the system
is consuming. Use of the fluorescent lamp and frequent disk access diverts power and
lengthens the charge time.
If any of the following occurs, the battery quick charge process stops.
1. The battery becomes fully charged.
2. The AC adaptor or battery is removed.
3. The battery or output voltage is abnormal.
q Detection of full charge
A full charge is detected only when the battery is charging at quick charge. A full charge is detected
under any of the following conditions:
1. The current in the battery charging circuit drops under the predetermined limit.
2. The charging time exceeds the fixed limit.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

1-35

1 Hardware Overview

1.12.3

1.12 Batteries

RTC battery

The RTC battery provides power to keep the current date, time and other setup information in
memory while the computer is turned off. Table 1-12 lists the charging time and data preservation
period of the RTC battery.
Table 1-12 RTC battery charging/data preservation time
Status

1-36

Time

Charging Time (power on)

15 hours

Data preservation period (full charge)

30 days

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

Chapter 2
Troubleshooting Procedures

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2-ii

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Chapter 2

Contents

2.1

Troubleshooting........................................................................................................... 2-1

2.2

Troubleshooting Flowchart........................................................................................... 2-2

2.3

Power Supply Troubleshooting..................................................................................... 2-6

2.4

2.5

2.6

2.7

2.8

Procedure 1

Icons in the LCD Check................................................................ 2-6

Procedure 2

Error Code Check ........................................................................ 2-7

Procedure 3

Connection Check....................................................................... 2-13

Procedure 4

Charge Check ............................................................................. 2-14

Procedure 5

Replacement Check .................................................................... 2-15

System Board Troubleshooting................................................................................... 2-16
Procedure 1

Message Check .......................................................................... 2-17

Procedure 2

Printer Port LED Check on Boot Mode....................................... 2-19

Procedure 3

Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check................................... 2-28

Procedure 4

Replacement Check .................................................................... 2-29

FDD Troubleshooting ................................................................................................ 2-30
Procedure 1

FDD Head Cleaning Check......................................................... 2-30

Procedure 2

Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check................................... 2-31

Procedure 3

Connector Check and Replacement Check.................................. 2-32

HDD Troubleshooting................................................................................................ 2-33
Procedure 1

Message Check .......................................................................... 2-33

Procedure 2

Partition Check ........................................................................... 2-34

Procedure 3

Format Check ............................................................................. 2-35

Procedure 4

Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check................................... 2-36

Procedure 5

Connector Check and Replacement Check.................................. 2-37

Keyboard and Touch pad Troubleshooting................................................................. 2-38
Procedure 1

Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check................................... 2-38

Procedure 2

Connector and Replacement Check ............................................. 2-39

Display Troubleshooting............................................................................................. 2-41
Procedure 1

Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check................................... 2-41

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

2-iii

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2.9

2.10

2.11

2.12

Procedure 2

Connector and Cable Check ....................................................... 2-41

Procedure 3

Replacement Check .................................................................... 2-42

CD-ROM Drive Troubleshooting............................................................................... 2-43
Procedure 1

Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check................................... 2-43

Procedure 2

Connector Check and Replacement Check.................................. 2-44

DVD-ROM, CD-RW/DVD-ROM and DVD Multi Drive Troubleshooting................. 2-45
Procedure 1

Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check................................... 2-45

Procedure 2

Connector Check and Replacement Check.................................. 2-46

Modem Troubleshooting ............................................................................................ 2-47
Procedure 1

Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check................................... 2-47

Procedure 2

Connector Check and Replacement Check.................................. 2-48

LAN Troubleshooting................................................................................................ 2-49
Procedure 1

2.13

2.14

2.15

2.16

2-iv

Connector Check and Replacement Check.................................. 2-49

Bluetooth Troubleshooting.......................................................................................... 2-50
Procedure 1

Transmitting-Receiving Check...................................................... 2-50

Procedure 2

Antennas' Connection Check....................................................... 2-51

Procedure 3

Antenna Check ........................................................................... 2-52

Procedure 4

Replacement Check .................................................................... 2-53

Wireless LAN Troubleshooting.................................................................................. 2-54
Procedure 1

Transmitting-Receiving Check...................................................... 2-54

Procedure 2

Antennas' Connection Check....................................................... 2-55

Procedure 3

Antenna Check ........................................................................... 2-56

Procedure 4

Replacement Check .................................................................... 2-57

Sound Troubleshooting.............................................................................................. 2-58
Procedure 1

Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check................................... 2-58

Procedure 2

Connector Check........................................................................ 2-59

Procedure 3

Replacement Check .................................................................... 2-60

SD Card Slot Troubleshooting ................................................................................... 2-61
Procedure 1

Check on Windows..................................................................... 2-61

Procedure 2

Connector/Replacement Check ................................................... 2-61

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

2-v

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Figures
Figure 2-1 Troubleshooting flowchart..................................................................................... 2-3
Figure 2-2 Printer port LED................................................................................................. 2-19
Figure 2-3 Antenna Test cable ............................................................................................. 2-52
Figure 2-4 Antenna Test cable ............................................................................................. 2-56

Tables
Table 2-1 Battery Icon............................................................................................................ 2-6
Table 2-2 DC IN Icon............................................................................................................ 2-6
Table 2-3 Printer port LED boot mode status ........................................................................ 2-20
Table 2-4 FDD error code and status.................................................................................... 2-31
Table 2-5 Hard disk drive error code and status .................................................................... 2-36

2-vi

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

2-vii

2.1 Troubleshooting

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2

2.1

Troubleshooting

Chapter 2 describes how to determine if a Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) in the computer is
causing the computer to malfunction. The FRUs covered are:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

System Board
Floppy Disk Drive
Hard Disk Drive
Keyboard
Display

6. CD-ROM Drive
7. DVD-ROM,
CD-RW/DVD-ROM and
DVD Multi Drive
8. Modem

9.
10.
11.
12.
13.

LAN
Bluetooth
Wireless LAN
Sound components
SD Card Slot

The Diagnostics Disk operations are described in Chapter 3. Detailed Replacement
Procedures are given in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.
The following tools are necessary for implementing the troubleshooting procedures:
1.
2.
3.
4.

Diagnostics Disk
Phillips screwdriver (2 mm)
LH-STIX screwdriver
Toshiba MS-DOS system disk(s)
(You must install the following onto the disk: SYS.COM, FORMAT.COM,
FDISK.COM and FDISK.EXE)
5. 2DD or 2HD formatted work disk for floppy disk drive testing
6. Cleaning kit for floppy disk drive troubleshooting
7. Serial port wraparound connector
8. PC card wraparound card
9. Multimeter
10. External USB FDD
11. External USB keyboard and Mouse
12. Headphone
13. Microphone
14. USB test module and USB cable
15. TOSHIBA CD-ROM TEST DISK (ZA1217P01/P000204190)
16. DVD-ROM TSD-1 (TOSHIBA EMI DVD Test Media)
17. Music CD
18. CD-RW Media (blank)
19. RJ11 connector checker
20. S/PDIF Speaker
21. Advanced Port Replicator
22. Persona l computer that can communicate by wireless LAN for wireless LAN
troubleshooting
23. Personal computer that can communicate by Bluetooth for Bluetooth troubleshooting
24. Antenna test cable

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2-1

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2.2

2.2 Troubleshooting Flowchart

Troubleshooting Flowchart

Use the flowchart in figure 2-1 as a guide for determining which troubleshooting procedures
to execute. Before going through the flowchart steps, verify the following:
q Ask the user if a password is registered and, if it is, ask him or her to enter the
password. If the user has forgotten the system password, perform the following
procedure at the appropriate step in the flowchart in figure 2-1:
Connect the printer port in the Port Replicator, hold down the “P” key and turn the
POWER switch on. The computer will override the password function by erasing the
current password.
q Verify with the customer that Microsoft Windows is installed on the hard disk. NonWindows operating systems can cause the computer to malfunction.
q Make sure all optional equipment is removed from the computer.
q Make sure the Externa l USB floppy disk drive is empty.

2-2

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2.2 Troubleshooting Flowchart

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Figure 2-1 Troubleshooting flowchart (1/2)

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2-3

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2.2 Troubleshooting Flowchart

Keyboard/Touch pad

Figure 2-1 Troubleshooting flowchart (2/2)

2-4

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2.2 Troubleshooting Flowchart

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

If the diagnostics program cannot detect an error, the problem may be intermittent. The
Running Test program should be executed several times to isolate the problem. Check the
Log Utilities function to confirm which diagnostic test detected an error, then perform the
appropriate troubleshooting procedures as follows:
1. If an error is detected on the system test, memory test, real timer test, perform the
System Board Troubleshooting Procedures in Section 2.4.
2. If an error is detected on the floppy disk test, perform the FDD Troubleshooting
Procedures in Section 2.5.
3. If an error is detected on the hard disk test, perform the HDD Troubleshooting
Procedures in Section 2.6.
4. If an error is detected on the keyboard test, perform the Keyboard and Touch pad
Troubleshooting Procedures in Section 2.7.
5. If an error is detected on the display test, perform the Display Troubleshooting
Procedures in Section 2.8.
6. If an error is detected on the CD-ROM test, perform the CD-ROM Drive
Troubleshooting Procedures in Section 2.9.
7. If an error is detected on the DVD-ROM, CD-RW/DVD-ROM or DVD Multi Drive
test, perform the DVD-ROM, CD-RW/DVD-ROM and DVD Multi Drive
Troubleshooting Procedures in Section 2.10.
8. If an error is detected on the modem test, perform the Modem Troubleshooting
Procedures in Section 2.11.
9. If an error is detected on the Bluetooth test, perform the Bluetooth Troubleshooting
Procedures in Section 2.13.
10. If an error is detected on the Wireless LAN test, perform the Wireless LAN
Troubleshooting Procedures in Section 2.14.
11. If an error is detected on the sound test, perform the Sound Troubleshooting
Procedures in Section 2.15.
12. If an error is detected on the SD card slot test, perform the SD Card Slot
Troubleshooting in Section 2.16.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2-5

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2.3

2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting

Power Supply Troubleshooting

The power supply controls many functions and components. To determine if the power
supply is functioning properly, start with Procedure 1 and continue with the other Procedures
as instructed. The procedures described in this section are:
Procedure 1: Icons in the Sub LCD Check
Procedure 2: Error Code Check
Procedure 3: Connection Check
Procedure 4: Charge Check
Procedure 5: Replacement Check
Procedure 1

Icons in the LCD Check

The following Icons in the LCD indicate the power supply status:
q Battery icon
q DC IN icon
The power supply controller displays the power supply status through the Battery icon and
the DC IN icon in the LCD as listed in the tables below. To check the power supply status,
install a battery pack and connect an AC adaptor.
Table 2-1 Battery Icon
Battery Icon

Power supply status

Lights Outline of the Battery

Main Battery is installed

Flashes / Lights

Charge / Full charge

Doesn’t light

Main Battery is NOT installed

Table 2-2 DC IN Icon
DC IN icon

2-6

Power supply status

Lights

DC power is being supplied from the AC adaptor.

Doesn’t light

Any condition other than those above.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting

Procedure 2

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Error Code Check

If the power supply microprocessor detects a malfunction, it indicates the error code as
shown below.
The error code begins with the least significant digit.
Error code
Error code
1*h

Where Error occurs
Adaptor

AC Adaptor is not connected.

(AC Adaptor, DS)

Error code begins with : 0x10
Error code ends with

2*h

The 1st battery

: 0x1F

The 1st Battery is not connected.
Error code begins with : 0x20
Error code ends with

3*h

The 2nd Battery

: 0x2F

The 2nd Battery is not connected.
Error code begins with : 0x30
Error code ends with

: 0x3F

4*h

S3V output

Operating Power ON

5*h

1R5 -C1V output

Error code begins with : 0x40

6*h

1R8 -C1V output

Error code ends with : 0xDF

7*h

PPV output

8*h

PGV output

9*h

E5V output

A*h

E3V output

B*h

1R2 -P1V output

C*h

PTV output

D*h

1R25-P1V output

E*h

2R5 -E2V output

F*h

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2-7

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Check 1

2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting

Compare the patterns in the hexadecimal error code to the tables below.

q DC IN
Error code

Meaning

10h

AC Adaptor output voltage is over 16.5V.

11h

Common Dock voltage is over 16.5V.

12h

Current from the DC power supply is over 6.05A.

13h

Current from the DC power supply is over 0.5A when there is no load.

14h

Current sensing IC is not normal.

q 1st Battery
Error code

Meaning

20h

Main battery charge current is more than 6.05 A.

21h

Main battery charge current is over 6.05A.

22h

Main battery discharge current over 0.5A.

23h

Main battery charge current is over 4.3A.

24h

Current sensing IC is not normal.

25h

Main battery charge current is over 0.3A.

q 2nd Battery
Error code

2-8

Meaning

30h

Overvoltage is detected. (Not supported)

31h

Main battery charge current is over 6.05A.

32h

Main battery discharge current is over 0.5A.

33h

Main battery charge current is over 3. 1A.

34h

Current sensing IC is not normal.

35h

Secondary battery charge current is over 0. 3A.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

q S3V output
Error code

Meaning

40h

S3V voltage is 3.14V or less when the computer is powered on/off.

45h

S3V voltage is 3.14V or less when the computer is booting up.
(CV support)

q 1R5-C1V output
Error code

Meaning

50h

1R5-C1V voltage is over 1. 80V.

51h

1R5-C1V voltage is 1.275V or less when the computer is powered on.

52h

1R5-C1V voltage is 1.275V or less when the computer is booting up.

53h

1R5-C1V voltage is 1.275V or less when the computer is suspended.

54h

1R5-C1V voltage is abnormal when the computer shuts down.
(CV support)

55h

1R5-C1V voltage is 1.275V or less when the computer is booting up.
(CV support)

q 1R8-C1V output
Error code

Meaning

60h

1R8-C1V voltage is over 2.16V when the computer is powered on/off.

61h

1R8-C1V voltage is 1.53V or less when the computer is powered on.

62h

1R8-C1V voltage is 1.53V or less when the computer is booting up.

63h

1R8-C1V voltage is 1.53V or less when the computer is suspended.

64h

1R8-C1V voltage is abnormal when the computer shuts down.
(CV support)

65h

1R8-C1V voltage is 1.53V or less when the computer is booting up.
(CV support)

q PPV output
Error code

Meaning

70h

PPV voltage is over 1.80V when the computer is powered on/off.

71h

PPV voltage is 0.56V or less when the computer is powered on.

72h

PPV voltage is 0.56V or less when the computer is booting up.

73h

PPV voltage is 0.56V or more when the computer is powered off.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2-9

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting

q PGV output
Error code

Meaning

80h

PGV voltage is over 1.92V when the computer is powered on/off.

81h

PGV voltage is 0.68V or less when the computer is powered on.

82h

PGV voltage is 0.68V or less when the computer is booting up.

83h

PGV voltage is 0.68V or more when the computer is powered off.

84h

PGV voltage is 0.68V or less when the computer is suspended.

q E5V output
Error code

Meaning

90h

E5V voltage is over 6.00V when the computer is powered on/off.

91h

E5V voltage is 4.50V or less when the computer is powered on.

92h

E5V voltage is 4.50V or less when the computer is booting up.

93h

E5V voltage is 4.50V or more when the computer is powered off.

94h

E5V voltage is 4.50V or less when the computer is suspended.

q E3V output
Error code

Meaning

A0h

E3V voltage is more than 3.96V when the computer is powered on/off.

A1h

E3V voltage is 2.81V or less when the computer is powered on.

A2h

E3V voltage is 2.81V or less when the computer is booting up.

A3h

E3V voltage is 2.81V or more when the computer is powered off.

A4h

E3V voltage is 2.81V or less when the computer is suspended.

q 1R2-PIV output
Error code

2-10

Meaning

B0h

1R2-PIV voltage is over 1.44V.

B1h

1R2-PIV voltage is 1.02V or less when the computer is powered on.

B2h

1R2-PIV voltage is 1.02V or less when the computer is booting up.

B3h

1R2-PIV voltage is 1.02V or more when the computer is powered off.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

q PTV output
Error code

Meaning

C0h

PTV voltage is over 1.26V when the computer is powered on/off.

C1h

PTV voltage is 0.89V or less when the computer is powered on.

C2h

PTV voltage is 0.89V or less when the computer is booting up.

C3h

PTV voltage is 0.89V or more when the computer is powered off.

C4h

PTV voltage is 0.89V or less when the computer is suspended.

q 1R25-P1V output
Error code

Meaning

D0h

1R25-P1V voltage is over 1.50V when the computer is powered on/off.

D1h

1R25-P1V voltage is 1.063V or less when the computer is powered
on.

D2h

1R25-P1V voltage is 1.063V or less when the computer is booting up.

D3h

1R25-P1V voltage is 1.063V or more when the computer is powered
off.

D4h

1R25-P1V voltage is 1.063V or less when the computer is suspended.

q 2R5-E2V output
Error code

Check 2

Meaning

E0h

2R5-E2V voltage is over 3.00V when the computer is powered on/off.

E1h

2R5-E2V voltage is 2.125V or less when the computer is powered on.

E2h

2R5-E2V voltage is 2.125V or less when the computer is booting up.

E3h

2R5-E2V voltage is 2.125V or more when the computer is powered off.

E4h

2R5-E2V voltage is 2.125V or less when the computer is suspended.

In the case of error code 10h or 12h:
q Make sure the AC adaptor cord and AC power cord are firmly plugged into
the DC IN 15 V socket and wall outlet. If the cables are connected correctly,
go to the following step:
q Connect a new AC adaptor and/or AC power cord, if necessary. If the error
still exists, go to Procedure 5.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2-11

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Check 3

2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting

In the case of error code 2Xh:
q Make sure the battery pack is correctly installed in the computer. If the
battery pack is correctly installed, go to the following step:
q Replace the battery pack with a new one. If the error still exists, go to
Procedure 5.

Check 4

2-12

For any other error, go to Procedure 5.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting

Procedure 3

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Connection Check

The power supply wiring diagram is shown below:

Any of the connectors may be disconnected. Perform Check 1.
Check 1

Disconnect the AC power cord from the wall outlet. Check the power cable for
breaks. If the power cord is damaged, connect a new AC power cord. If there is
no damage, go to Check 2.

Check 2

Make sure the AC adaptor cord and AC power cord are firmly plugged into the
PJ8800 DC IN 15 V socket and AC adaptor inlet/wall outlet, respectively. If these
cables are connected correctly, go to Check 3.

Check 3

Make sure the DC IN input port where an AC adaptor’s DC output plug is
connected is firmly secured to the system board.
• If the DC IN input port is loose, go to Procedure 5.
• If it is not loose, go to Check 4.

Check 4

Use a multimeter to make sure the AC adaptor output voltage is close to 15 V. If
the output is several percent lower than 15 V, go to Check 5. If the output is close
to 15 V, go to Check 6.

Check 5

Connect a new AC adaptor or AC power cord.
• If the DC IN icon does not light, go to Procedure 5.
• If the battery icon does not light, go to Check 6.

Check 6

Make sure the battery pack is installed in the computer correctly. If the battery is
properly installed and the battery icon still does not light, go to Procedure 4.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2-13

2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 4

2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting

Charge Check

The power supply may not charge the battery pack. Perform the following procedures:
1. Reinstall the battery pack.
2. Attach the AC adaptor and turn on the power. If you cannot turn on the power, go to
Procedure 5.
3. Run the Diagnostic test, go to System test and execute subtest 06 (Quick charge)
described in Chapter 3.
4. When charge is complete, the diagnostics test displays the result code. Check the
result code against the table below and perform any necessary check.
Result code

Contents

Check items

0

The battery is charging normally.

Normal

1

The battery is fully charged.

Normal

2

The AC adaptor is not attached.

Check 1

3

The AC adaptor’s output voltage is not normal.

Check 1

4

The battery is not installed.

Check 2

5

The battery’s output voltage is not normal.

Check 3

6

The battery’s temperature is not normal.

Check 4

7

A bad battery is installed.

Check 2

8

Any other problems.

Check 5

Check 1

Make sure the AC adaptor and AC power cord are firmly plugged into the DC IN
socket and the wall outlet. If these cables are connected correctly, replace the AC
adaptor (and/or AC power cord, if necessary).

Check 2

Make sure the battery is properly installed. If the battery is properly installed, go
to Check 3.

Check 3

The battery pack may be completely discharged. Wait a few minutes to charge the
battery pack. If the battery pack is still not charged, go to Check 4.

Check 4

The battery’s temperature is too hot or cold. Return the temperature to a normal
operating condition. If the battery pack still is not charged, go to Check 5.

Check 5

Replace the battery pack with a new one. If the battery pack still is not charged,
go to Procedure 5.

2-14

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting

Procedure 5

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Replacement Check

The system board processor module may be disconnected or damaged. Disassemble the
computer following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. Check the
connection between the AC adaptor and system board and connection. After checking the
connections, perform the following Check 1:
Check 1

Replace the AC adaptor with a new one. If the AC adaptor is still not functioning
properly, perform Check 2.

Check 2

Use a multimeter to make sure that the F800, F810 and F820 fuse are not blown.
If fuses are not blown, go to Check 3.

Check 3 Replace the system board with a new one following the steps described in Chapter
4, Replacement Procedures.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2-15

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2.4

2.5 FDD TroubleshootingSystem Board Troubleshooting

System Board Troubleshooting

This section describes how to determine if the system board and CPU are defective or not
functioning properly. Start with Procedure 1 and continue with the other procedures as
instructed.
The procedures described in this section are:
Procedure 1: Message Check
Procedure 2: Printer Port LED Check on Resume Mode
Procedure 3: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 4: Replacement Check

2-16

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2.4 System Board Troubleshooting

Procedure 1

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Message Check

When the power is turned on, the system performs the Initial Reliability Test (IRT) installed
in the BIOS ROM. The IRT tests each IC on the system board and initializes it.
q If an error message is shown on the display, perform Check 1.
q If there is no error message, go to Procedure 2.
q If Toshiba MS-DOS or Windows Me is properly loaded, go to Procedure 3.
Check 1

If one of the following error messages appears on the screen, press F1 as the
message instructs. These errors occur when the system configuration preserved in
the RTC memory (CMOS type memory) is not the same as the actual
configuration or when the data is lost.
If you press F1 as the message instruc ts, returns all system settings to their default
values. Then the system reboots.
If error message (b) appears often when the power is turned on, replace the RTC
battery. If any other error message displays, perform Check 2.
(a)

*** Bad HDD type ***
Check system. Then press [F1] key ......

(b)

*** Bad RTC battery ***
Check system. Then press [F1] key ......

(c)

*** Bad configuration ***
Check system. Then press [F1] key ......

(d)

*** Bad memory size ***
Check system. Then press [F1] key ......

(e)

*** Bad time function ***
Check system. Then press [F1] key ......

(f)

*** Bad check sum (CMOS) ***
Check system. Then press [F1] key ......

(g)

*** Bad check sum (ROM) ***
Check system. Then press [F1] key ......

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2-17

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Check 2

2.5 FDD TroubleshootingSystem Board Troubleshooting

The IRT checks the system board. When the IRT detects an error, the system
stops or an error message appears.
If one of the following error messages (1) through (17), (24) or (25) appears, go to
Procedure 5.
If the error message (18) appears, go to the Keyboard Troubleshooting Procedures
in Section 2.7.
If the error message (19) or (20) appears, go to the HDD Troubleshooting
Procedures in Section 2.6.
If the error message (21) appears, go to the CD-R/RW Drive Troubleshooting
Procedures in Section 2.9 or the COMBO Drive Troubleshooting Procedures in
Section 2.10
If the error message (22) or (23) appears, go to the FDD Troubleshooting
Procedures in Section 2.5.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)

2-18

PIT ERROR
MEMORY REFRESH ERROR
TIMER CH.2 OUT ERROR
CMOS CHECKSUM ERROR
CMOS BAD BATTERY ERROR
FIRST 64KB MEMORY ERROR
FIRST 64KB MEMORY PARITY ERROR
VRAM ERROR
SYSTEM MEMORY ERROR
SYSTEM MEMORY PARITY ERROR
EXTENDED MEMORY ERROR
EXTENDED MEMORY PARITY ERROR
DMA PAGE REGISTER ERROR
DMAC #1 ERROR
DMAC #2 ERROR
PIC #1 ERROR
PIC #2 ERROR
KBC ERROR
HDC ERROR
IDE #0 ERROR
IDE #1 ERROR
NO FDD ERROR
FDC ERROR
TIMER INTERRUPT ERROR
RTC UPDATE ERROR

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2.4 System Board Troubleshooting

Procedure 2

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Printer Port LED Check on Boot Mode

The printer port LED displays the IRT (Initial Reliability Test) status and test status by
turning lights on and off as an eight-digit binary value for boot mode. Figure 2-2 shows the
printer port LED.

Figure 2-2 Printer port LED
To use the printer port LED, follow the steps below:
1. Plug the printer port LED into the parallel port of the Advanced Port Replicator 2001.
2. Read the LED status from left to right as you are facing the back of the computer.
3. Convert the status from binary to hexadecimal notation.
4. If the final LED status is FFh (normal status), go to Procedure 4.
5. If the final LED status matches any of the test status values in Table 2-3, perform
Check 1.
NOTE: If an error is detected by the IRT test, the printer port LED displays an error
code after the IRT test ends. For example, when the printer port LED displays B2 and
halts, the IRT test has already completed the KBC initialization. In this instance, the IRT
indicates an error has been detected during the BIOS rewrite.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2-19

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2.5 FDD TroubleshootingSystem Board Troubleshooting

Table 2-3 Printer port LED boot mode status (1/8)
LED Status
FFh

Test item
Start

Message
Register initialization for boot block
Clearance of software reset bit
Permission of A20 line
Initialization for special register and Intel chip set

B0H

Flash ROM check

PIT CH0 initialization (for HOLD_ON)
BIOS rewrite flag initialization
Checksum check
Transition to protected mode
Boot block checksum (HLT when check error occurred.)
Checksum check except boot block

B1H

EC/KBC rewrite check

Transition to BIOS rewriting when required
Enabling KB
[tilde] [TAB] key check

B2H

BIOS rewrite request check

B3H

System BIOS rewrite transition to
IRT

Transition to BIOS rewriting when checksum error other
than Boot Block is detected, or user requested rewriting.

Rewriting BIOS
H/W initialization

Setting of base for Power Management I/O Space
Enabling BIOS writing
Serial interrupt control
Disabling BIOS rewrite protection
Enabling SM Bus I/O space
Enabling SM Bus access
Opening work I/O for SDRAM initialization
Setting FDC prohibition

Initialization of HW for each model
Initialization of PIT channel 1
(Setting refresh interval to 30ms)
Initialization of PIT, DMAC, PIC
DRAM configuration
Enabling L1 cache
Memory clear
Transition to real mode, copy BIOS
to RAM

2-20

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2.4 System Board Troubleshooting

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Table 2-3 Printer port LED boot mode status (2/8)
LED Status
B5H

Test item

Message

Storing key scan code
Setting of TASK_1ms_TSC
Display initialization

B6H

FAN control
Sound controller initialization (for
beep)

Enabling system speaker
Disabling mute
Setting volume to max

Message display

CEC/KBC UPDATE/DAMAGED, BIOS
UPDATE/DAMAGED

Key input

Disabling USB
Sound beep
Waiting for key input

Reading
CHGBIOSA.EXE/CHGFIRMA.EXE

FDC reset
Setting of parameter for 2HD (1.44MB), transmission rate
Reading first sector
Setting of parameter for 2DD (720KB), transmission rate
Search of CHGBIOSA.EXE from route directory
Calculation of directory start head, sector
Reading contents of route directory by one sector
Search of entry for "CHGBIOSA.EXE"/
"CHGFIRMA.EXE", from the sector read
Reading of EXE header of "CHGBIOSA.EXE"/
"CHGFIRMA.EXE" key input when an error occurred
Execute "CHGBIOSA.EXE"/"CHGFIRMA.EXE"

B3H

Prohibition of cache

Prohibition of cache
Initialization of special register

00H

PIT CH1 initialization

(Setting refresh interval to 30ms)

01H

Check of DRAM type and size

(at Cold Boot)
(HLT when the DRAM type is 0)

SM-RAM stack area test
02H

(HLT when the stack area can not be used.)

Cache configuration
Enabling L1 cache
CMOS access test

(at Cold Boot) (HLT when an error is detected.)

Battery level check of CMOS
CMOS checksum check

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2-21

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2.5 FDD TroubleshootingSystem Board Troubleshooting

Table 2-3 Printer port LED boot mode status (3/8)
LED Status
(02H)

Test item

Message

Initialization of CMOS data (1)
Setting of IRT status

(Boot status and IRT busy flag, the remaining bit is 0.)
Storing DRAM size in CMOS

03H

Resume branch (at Cold Boot)

Not resume when a CMOS error occurred
Not resume when resume status code is not set
Resume error check
1CH Power Failure error (Resume error 7AH)
SM-RAM checksum check (Resume error 73H)
Check of memory configuration change (Resume error
73H)
RAM area checksum check in system BIOS (Resume
error 79H)
PnP RAM checksum check (Resume error 77H)
Transition to RESUME-MAIN

Resume error

Reset of CPU clock to low
Prohibition of all SMI
Clearance of resume status
Return to ROM
Designating the area of C0000h-EFFFFh to PCI
(Prohibition of DRAM)
Setting of resume error request

System BIOS ROM/RAM copy
04H

SM RAM initialization
Check of Wake Up factor
Rewriting of SMRAM base and
Storing CPU state map for BIOS
Enabling SMI only by ASMI

05H

Initialization of a device which
needs initialization before
initialization of PCI bus

PIT test (at Cold Boot) and initialization
Setting of test pattern for PIT#0 CH0
Check whether the test pattern set can be read.
Initialization of PIT CH0 (Setting of timer interrupt interval
to 55ms)
Initialization of PIT CH2 (Setting of sound generator
frequency to 664Hz)
Test of PIT CH1 (Check whether a refresh signal is
working properly when refresh interval is set to 30ms.
HLT when the time is out.)

2-22

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2.4 System Board Troubleshooting

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Table 2-3 Printer port LED boot mode status (4/8)
LED Status
(05H)

Test item
(Initialization of a device which
needs initialization before
initialization of PCI bus)

Message
Test of PIT CH2 (Check whether the speaker gate is
working properly.)
Measuring of CPU clock
Enabling SMI except for auto-off function
Control of battery discharge current (10mA)
Division process of measuring IRT time
Setting for clock generator
Check of parameter block A
CPU initialization
Update of micro code
Check of Geyserville support
Setting of CPU clock to high
Setting of Graphics Aperature Size

06H

Storing memory configuration in
buffer
Reading EC version
Update of flash ROM type
Evaluation of destination
(home/overseas) by DMI data
Setting default when a CMOS
default error (Bad Battery, Bad
Checksum (ROM, CMOS))
occurred
Initialization of ACPI table (for
executing an option ROM)
Initialization of a device that needs
initialization before PCI bus
initialization

AC’97 control
Initialization of temperature control information
KBC initialization
VGA display off and reset control
Sound initialization
Acquisition of status
HC initialization, Recognition of USB device connection
and initialization
Control of interval LAN enable/disable

PIC initialization
PIC test

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2-23

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2.5 FDD TroubleshootingSystem Board Troubleshooting

Table 2-3 Printer port LED boot mode status (5/8)
LED Status

Test item

(06H)

Message
Check whether self test is necessary or not (at Cold
Boot) (Check of space key and printer wraparound
connector)
Password initialization

07H

PCI Bus initialization

PCI Bus initialization (Connection of DS Bus)
Initialization of LAN information
Check of Wakeup factor

08H

CMOS data initialization

Running a task waiting for the end of INIT PCI
CMOS data initialization (2)
PnP initialization
Setting of setup item
Waiting for the end of Multi Box status check
H/W configuration from PnP resource

09H

Initialization of PnP H/W

Running a task waiting for the end of PnP resource
Serial interrupt control (before using interrupt)
Initialization of PnP H/W
Initialization of PC card slot
SIO initialization
FIR initialization
PCI automatic configuration
Creating a work area for auto configuration
Acquisition of PCI IRQ
Configuration
Storing the results of VGA configuration

0AH

Initialization of H/W that is
necessary after PCI configuration

Running a task waiting the end of
PCI_CONFIGURATION
Initialization of H/W that is necessary after PCI
configuration
Printer port setting
Start of HDD initialization sequence
SD initialization
Creating output code

0BH

First 6KB memory check

0CH

Vector initialization

0DH

NDP initialization

2-24

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2.4 System Board Troubleshooting

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Table 2-3 Printer port LED boot mode status (6/8)
LED Status
0EH

Test item
System initialization

Message
Storing CMOS error status in IRT error status buffer
Start of TIMER initialization
Initialization of buffer for power save
Update of system BIOS (model name, EDID of the LCD)

0FH

Display initialization

Waiting for the end of VGA chip initialization

10H

LOGO display

11H

Conventional memory check

(Boot)

12H

Extension memory check

Check of exceptional cases in protected mode (Boot)

13H

Conventional memory initialization
(Reboot)
(LED=14H when an error is
detected in check of exceptional
cases in protected mode)

15H

DMA Page Register check

(Boot)

16H

DMAC check

(Boot)

17H

DMAX initialization

(Boot)

18H

Printer check

19H

SIO check

1AH

Password check

(Reboot)
Waiting for the end of HDD initialization
Key input check during IRT (Waiting for the end of KBC
initialization)
ATA priority initialization
(Boot)
BM loading
BM initialization
Key input check during IRT (Waiting for the end of KBC
initialization)
Password input
Enabling BM

1BH

Extension I/O ROM check

1CH

Final setting up prior to boot-up

Storing the value of 40:00h (for SIO save/store)
Font address setting for resume password
Setting of parameter for character repeat on a USB
keyboard

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2-25

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2.5 FDD TroubleshootingSystem Board Troubleshooting

Table 2-3 Printer port LED boot mode status (7/8)
LED Status
(1CH)

Test item
(Final setting up prior to boot-up)

Message
Getting keys pressed during the IRT
Storing shadow RAM size
Update of system resources information prior to boot-up
Rewriting memory map data for INT15h E820h
Waiting for the end of AC-Link initialization
Updating a table for DMI
Copying an ACPI table to the top of an expansion
memory
Waiting for the end of writing PSC version on BIOS
Waiting for the end of clock generator setting (Stop at
LED=1DH when an error occurred)
Waiting for the end of serial port initialization
Canceling NMI Mask
Examining the checksum of TIT
Clearance of IRT running flag for runtime
Updating checksum for runtime
Branching to hibernation
Bluetooth initialization
Check whether a target maintenance card is set
Disabling a PC card not used
HW initialization prior to boot, Waiting for the end of HW
initialization
Notifying the condition of DVI connection to VGA BIOS
Setting battery save mode
Setting of date
Waiting for the end of Bluetooth initialization
Updating DMI Wakeup factor and SM-BIOS structure
table
Closing configuration space for PCI device
Cache control
Updating of parameter block A
Process for CPU

2-26

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2.4 System Board Troubleshooting

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Table 2-3 Printer port LED boot mode status (8/8)
LED Status
(1CH)

Test item
(Final setting up prior to boot-up)

Message
Setting the clock speed of CPU to the appointed value by
setup
Waiting for motor off of a disabled HDD
Final decision of USB FDD drive information
After-treatment of setup prior to boot-up
Clearance of power button status
Enabling power button
Taking a measure against USB operation
Failure at high temperature

FFH

Check 1

End

If the following error codes are displayed, go to Procedure 5.
B0h, B1h, B2h, B3h, B4h, B5h, B6h, 00h, 01h, 02h, 03h, 04h, 05h, 06h, 07h,
08h, 09h, 0Ah, 0Bh, 0Ch, 0Dh, 0Eh, 0Fh, 10h, 11h, 12h, 13h, 14h, 15h, 16h,
17h, 18h, 19h, 1Bh, 1Ch, 1Dh, 1Eh

Check 2

If the error code 81h or 82h is displayed, go to Section 2.5 FDD Troubleshooting
and Section 2.6 HDD Troubleshooting.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2-27

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Procedure 3

2.5 FDD TroubleshootingSystem Board Troubleshooting

Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check

Execute the following tests from the Diagnostic Test Menu. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and
Diagnostics, for more information on how to perform these tests.
1. System test
2. Memory test
3. Keyboard test
4. Display test
5. Floppy Disk test
6. Hard Disk test
7. Real Timer test
8. NDP test
9. Expansion test
10. Sound/Modem test
11. CD-ROM/DVD-ROM test
12. Bluetooth test
13. Wireless LAN test
If an error is detected during these tests, go to Procedure 3.

2-28

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2.4 System Board Troubleshooting

Procedure 4

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Replacement Check

The system board connectors may be disconnected. Disassemble the computer following the
steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures and perform Check 1.
Check 1

Visually check for the following:
a) Cracked or broken connector housing
b) Damaged connector pins
If their connectors are in good condition, but there is still a problem, go to
Check 2.

Check 2

The system board may be damaged. Replace the system board with a new one
following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2-29

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2.5

2.5 FDD TroubleshootingFDD Troubleshooting

FDD Troubleshooting

This section describes how to determine if the FDD is functioning properly. Perform the
steps below starting with Procedure 1 and continuing with the other procedures as required.
Procedure 1: FDD Head Cleaning Check
Procedure 2: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 3: Connector Check and Replacement Check
Procedure 1

FDD Head Cleaning Check

FDD head cleaning operation details are given in Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics.
Insert the Diagnostics Disk in the computer’s floppy disk drive, turn on the computer and run
the test. Clean the FDD heads using the cleaning kit. If the FDD still does not function
properly after cleaning, go to Procedure 2.
If the test program cannot be executed, go to Procedure 3.

2-30

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2.5 FDD Troubleshooting

Procedure 2

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check

Insert the Diagnostics Disk in the FDD, turn on the computer and run the test. Refer to
Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics, for more information about the diagnostics test procedures.
Floppy disk drive test error codes and their status names are listed in Table 2-3. Make sure
the floppy disk is formatted correctly and that the write protect tab is disabled. If any other
errors occur while executing the FDD diagnostics test, go to Check 1.
Table 2-4 FDD error code and status
Code

Check 1

Status

01h

Bad command

02h

Address mark not found

03h

Write protected

04h

Record not found

06h

Media removed on dual attach card

08h

DMA overrun error

09h

DMA boundary error

10h

CRC error

20h

FDC error

40h

Seek error

60h

No FDD

80h

Time out error (Not ready)

EEh

Write buffer error

FFh

Data compare error

If the following message appears, disable the write protect tab on the floppy disk.
If any other message appears, perform Check 2.
Write protected

Check 2

Make sure the floppy disk is formatted correctly. If it is, go to Procedure 3.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2-31

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Procedure 3

2.5 FDD Troubleshooting

Connector Check and Replacement Check

The USB 3.5- inch FDD is connected to the System Board.
Check 1

When using the USB port 0 or 1, make sure the USB FDD cable is firmly
connected to PJ2033 or PJ2034 on the system board. When using the USB port 2,
make sure the USB FDD cable is connected to PJ3301, and the USB cable is
firmly connected to PJ1004 on the system board and PJ3300 on the USB board.
USB Board
PJ3300

PJ3301

PJ1004
PJ2033/
PJ2034

USB FDD cable

If any of the connections are loose, reconnect firmly and repeat Procedure 2.
If any of the connections is damaged, or there is still an error, go to Check 2.
Check 2

The USB FDD or USB FDD cable may be defective or damaged. Replace it with
a new one. If the USB FDD is still not functioning properly, perform Check 3.

Check 3

Replace the System board with a new one following the steps in Chapter 4,
Replacement Procedures.

2-32

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2.6 HDD Troubleshooting

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2

2.6

HDD Troubleshooting

This section describes how to determine if the HDD is functioning properly. Perform the
steps below starting with Procedure 1 and continuing with the other procedures as required.
Procedure 1: Message Check
Procedure 2: Partition Check
Procedure 3: Format Check
Procedure 4: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 5: Connector Check and Replacement Check
CAUTION: The contents of the hard disk will be erased when you execute the HDD
troubleshooting procedures. Transfer the contents of the hard disk to floppy disks or other
storage media.
Procedure 1

Message Check

When the computer’s HDD does not function properly, some of the following error messages
may appear on the display. Start with Check 1 below and perform the other checks as
instructed.
Check 1

If any of the following messages appear, go to Procedure 5. If the following
messages do not appear, perform Check 2.
HDC ERROR (After 5 seconds this message will disappear.)
or
IDE #0 ERROR (After 5 seconds this message will disappear.)
or
IDE #1 ERROR (After 5 seconds this message will disappear.)

Check 2

If either of the following messages appears, go to Procedure 2. If the following
messages do not appear, perform Check 3.
Insert system disk in drive
Press any key when ready .....
or
Non-System disk or disk error
Replace and press any key

Check 3

Make sure the Hard Disk option is set to not used. If it is set to not used, choose
another setting and restart the computer. If the problem still exists, go to
Procedure 2.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2-33

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Procedure 2

2.6 HDD Troubleshooting

Partition Check

Insert the Toshiba MS-DOS system disk and restart the computer with U key holding down.
Perform the following checks:
Check 1

Type C: and press Enter. If you cannot change to drive C, go to Check 2. If you
can change to drive C, go to Check 3.

Check 2

Type FDISK and press Enter. Choose Display Partition Information from the
FDISK menu. If drive C is listed, go to Check 3. If drive C is not listed, return to
the FDISK menu and choose the option to create a DOS partition on drive C.
Restart the computer from the Toshiba MS-DOS system disk. If the problem still
exists, go to Procedure 3.

Check 3

If drive C is listed as active in the FDISK menu, go to Check 4. If drive C is not
listed as active, return to the FDISK menu and choose the option to set the active
partition for drive C. Restart the computer and then go to Procedure 3.

Check 4

Remove the FD and restart the computer. If the problem still exists, go to
Procedure 3.

Check 5

Using the SYS command on the Toshiba MS-DOS system disk, install system
files on the HDD.
If the following message appears on the display, the system files have been
transferred to the HDD. Restart the computer. If the problem still exists, go to
Procedure 3.
System transferred
NOTE: If the computer is running Windows 2000, OSR2 or higher and the hard
disk has more than 512 MB capacity, the FDISK program will ask if you need
support for a partition larger than 2GB. Select Y for large partition support;
however, be sure to read the precaution regarding access by other operating
systems.

2-34

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2.6 HDD Troubleshooting

Procedure 3

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Format Check

The computer’s HDD is formatted using the low level format program and the MS-DOS
FORMAT program. To format the HDD, start with Check 1 below and perform the other
steps as required.
Check 1

Format the HDD and transfer system files using FORMAT C:/S/U. If the
following message appears on the display, the HDD is formatted.
Format complete
If an error message appears on the display, refer to the Toshiba MS-DOS Manual
for more information and perform Check 2.

Check 2

Using the Diagnostics Disk, format the HDD with a low level format option.
Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics for more information about the
diagnostic program.
If the following message appears on the display, the HDD low level format is
complete. Partition and format the HDD using the MS-DOS FORMAT command.
Format complete
If you cannot format the HDD using the Tests and Diagnostic program, go to
Procedure 4.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2-35

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Procedure 4

2.6 HDD Troubleshooting

Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check

The HDD test program is stored in the Diagnostics Disk. Perform all of the HDD tests in the
Hard Disk Drive Test. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics, for more information about
the HDD test program.
If an error is detected during the HDD test, an error code and status will be displayed.
Replace the HDD with a new one following the instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement
Procedures. The error codes and statuses are listed in Table 2-4. If an error code is not
generated or the problem still exists, go to Procedure 5.
Table 2-5 Hard disk drive error code and status
Code

2-36

Status

01h

Bad command

02h

Bad address mark

04h

Record not found

05h

HDC not reset

07h

Drive not initialized

08h

HDC overrun (DRQ)

09h

DMA boundary error

0Ah

Bad sector error

0Bh

Bad track error

10h

ECC error

11h

ECC recover enable

20h

HDC error

40h

Seek error

80h

Time out error

AAh

Drive not ready

BBh

Undefined error

CCh

Write fault

E0h

Status error

EEh

Access time out error

DAh

No HDD

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2.6 HDD Troubleshooting
Procedure 5

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Connector Check and Replacement Check

The HDD may be disconnected, or the HDD or the system board may be damaged.
Disassemble the computer following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement
Procedures and perform the following checks:
Check 1

Make sure the HDD is firmly connected to PJ1509 on the system board.

If any of the connections are loose, reconnect firmly and repeat Procedure 1. If
there is still an error, go to Check 2.
Check 2

The HDD may be damaged. Replace it with a new one following the instructions
in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the problem still exists, perform Check
3.

Check 3

The System board may be damaged. Replace it with a new one following the
instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the problem still exists,
perform Check 4.

Check 4

The CPU may be damaged. Replace it with a new one following the instructions
in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2-37

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2.7

2.7 Keyboard and Touch pad Troubleshooting

Keyboard and Touch pad Troubleshooting

To determine if the computer’s keyboard or touch pad is functioning properly, perform the
following procedures. Start with Procedure 1 and continue with the other procedures as
instructed.
Procedure 1: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 2: Connector and Replacement Check
Procedure 1

Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check

Execute the Keyboard Test in the Diagnostic Program. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and
Diagnostics, for more information on how to perform the test program.
If an error occurs, go to Procedure 2. If an error does not occur, the keyboard is functioning
properly.

2-38

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2.7 Keyboard and Touch pad Troubleshooting

Procedure 2

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Connector and Replacement Check

The keyboard, touch pad or sensor/switch board may be disconnected or damaged.
Disassemble the computer following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement
Procedures, and perform the following checks:
1. If the keyboard or AccuPoint malfunctions, start with Check 1.
2. If the touch pad malfunctions, start with Check 3.
3. If the power switch, InTouch button or Presentation button malfunctions, start with
Check 5.
Check 1

Make sure the keyboard cable is securely connected to PJ123 on the system
board.

If the connection is loose, reconnect firmly and repeat Procedure 2. If there is still
an error, go to Check 2.
Check 2

The keyboard or its cable may be damaged. Replace it with a new one following
the instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the problem still exists,
perform Check 7.

Check 3

Make sure the touch pad cable is firmly connected to PJ2003 on the system board.

Touch pad

Touch pad cable

If the connection is loose, reconnect firmly and repeat Procedure 2. If there is still
an error, go to Check 4.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2-39

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2.7 Keyboard and Touch pad Troubleshooting

Check 4

The touch pad or the touch pad cable may be damaged. Replace it with a new one
following the instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the problem
still exists, perform Check 7.

Check 5

Make sure the cable of the Sensor/Switch board is firmly connected to PJ1000 on
the system board, and the sensor/switch board cable is connected to PJ3200 on the
sensor/switch board.
Sensor/Switch
Board
PJ3200

If the connection is loose, reconnect firmly and repeat Procedure 1. If there is still
an error, go to Check 6.
Check 6

The Sensor/Switch board may be damaged. Replace it with a new one following
the instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If there is still an error, go
to Check 7.

Check 7

The system board may be damaged. Replace it with a new one following the
instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.

2-40

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2.8 Display Troubleshooting

2.8

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Display Troubleshooting

This section describes how to determine if the computer’s display is functioning properly.
Start with Procedure 1 and continue with the other procedures as instructed.
Procedure 1: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 2: Connector and Cable Check
Procedure 3: Replacement Check
Procedure 1

Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check

The Display Test program is stored on the computer’s Diagnostics disk. This program checks
the display controller on the system board. Insert the Diagnostics disk in the computer’s
floppy disk drive, turn on the computer and run the test. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and
Diagnostics for details. If an error is detected, go to Procedure 3.
Procedure 2

Connector and Cable Check

The LCD Module is connected to the system board by an LCD/FL cable. The FL inverter
board is also connected to the system board by an LCD/FL cable. The connectors may be
disconnected from the system board or may be damaged. Disassemble the computer
following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.
If the connection is loose, reconnect firmly and restart the computer. If there is still an error,
go to Procedure 3.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2-41

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Procedure 3

2.8 Display Troubleshooting

Replacement Check

The FL, FL inverter board, LCD module, and system board are connected to display circuits.
Any of these components may be damaged. Refer to Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures, for
instructions on how to disassemble the computer and then perform the following checks:
If the FL does not light, perform Check 1.
If characters or graphics are not displayed clearly, perform Check 1.
If some screen functions do not operate properly, perform Check 3.
If the FL remains lit when the display is closed, perform Check 5.
Check 1

Replace the FL with a new one following the instructions in Chapter 4,
Replacement Procedures and test the display again. If the problem still exists,
perform Check2.

Check 2

Replace the FL with a new one following the instructions in Chapter 4,
Replacement Procedures and test the display again. If the problem still exists,
perform Check 3.

Check 3

Replace the LCD module with a new one following the instructions in Chapter 4,
Replacement Procedures and test the disp lay again. If the problem still exists,
perform Check 4.

Check 4

Replace the display cable (FL cable and LCD cable) with a new one following the
instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures and test the display again. If
the problem still exists, perform Check 5.

Check 5

The display controller on the system board may be damaged. Replace it with a
new one following the instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.

2-42

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2.9 CD-ROM Drive Troubleshooting

2.9

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

CD-ROM Drive Troubleshooting

This section describes how to determine if the computer’s internal CD-ROM drive is
functioning properly. Perform the steps below starting with Procedure 1 and continue with
the other procedures as required.
Procedure 1: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 2: Connector Check and Replacement Check
Procedure 1

Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check

The CD-ROM/DVD-ROM test program is stored in the Diagnostics Disk.
For the CD-ROM test, prepare a test CD-RW.
Then insert the Diagnostics Disk in the computer’s floppy disk drive, turn on the computer
and run the test. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics, for more information about the
diagnostics test procedures.
If any errors occur while executing the CD-ROM/DVD-ROM test, go to Procedure 2.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2-43

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Procedure 2

2.9 CD-ROM Drive Troubleshooting

Connector Check and Replacement Check

The CD-ROM drive is connected to the system board. The connectors may be disconnected
from the system board or may be damaged. Disassemble the computer following the steps
described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures, and perform the following checks:
Check 1

Make sure the CD-ROM drive is firmly connected to PJ1511 on the system board.

If the connection is loose, reconnect firmly and repeat Procedure 1. If there is still
an error, go to Check 2.
Check 2

The CD-ROM drive may be defective or damaged. Replace the drive with a new
one. If there is still an error, go to Check 3.

Check 3

Replace the system board with a new one following the steps in Chapter 4,
Replacement Procedures.

2-44

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2.10

DVD -ROM, CD-RW/DVD -ROM and DVD Multi Drive Troubleshooting

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2.10 DVD-ROM, CD-RW/DVD-ROM and DVD Multi Drive
Troubleshooting
This section describes how to determine if the DVD-ROM, CD-RW/DVD-ROM or DVD
Multi drive in the Slim Select Bay is functioning properly. Perform the steps below starting
with Procedure 1 and continue with the other procedures as required.
Procedure 1: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 2: Connector Check and Replacement Check
Procedure 1

Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check

The CD-ROM/DVD-ROM test program is stored in the Diagnostics Disk.
For the test, prepare a test DVD-ROM and CD-RW Media (branch).
Then insert the Diagnostics Disk in the computer’s floppy disk drive, turn on the computer
and run the test. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics, for more information about the
diagnostics test procedures.
If any errors occur while executing the CD-ROM/DVD-ROM test, go to Procedure 2.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2-45

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Procedure 2

2.10

DVD -ROM, CD-RW/DVD-ROM and DVD Multi Drive Troubleshooting

Connector Check and Replacement Check

The DVD-ROM, CD-RW/DVD-ROM or DVD Multi drive is connected to the system board.
The connectors may be disconnected from the system board or may be damaged.
Disassemble the computer following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement
Procedures and perform the following checks:
Check 1

Make sure the drive to test is firmly connected to PJ1511 on the system board.

DVD-ROM or
CD-RW/DVD ROM or
DVD Multi drive

If the connection is loose, reconnect firmly and repeat Procedure 1. If there is still
an error, go to Check 2.
Check 2

The drive may be defective or damaged. Replace the drive with a new one. If
there is still an error, go to Check 3.

Check 3

Replace the system board with a new one following the steps in Chapter 4,
Replacement Procedures.

2-46

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2.11 Modem Troubleshooting

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2.11 Modem Troubleshooting
This section describes how to determine if the computer's modem is functioning properly.
Perform the steps below starting with Procedure 1 and continuing with the other procedures
as required.
Procedure 1: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 2: Connector Check and Replacement Check
Procedure 1

Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check

The Sound/Modem test program is stored in the Diagnostics Disk.
Insert the Diagnostics Disk in the computer’s floppy disk drive, turn on the computer and run
the test. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics, for more information about the
diagnostics test procedures.
If any errors occur while executing the Sound/Modem test, go to Procedure 2.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2-47

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Procedure 2

2.11 Modem Troubleshooting

Connector Check and Replacement Check

The Modem is installed as a modem daughter card (MDC). If the modem malfunctions, there
may be a bad connection between the MDC and the system board. Or the MDC, system
board or their connectors might be damaged.
Disassemble the computer following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement
Procedures and perform the following checks:
Check 1

Make sure the MDC is firmly connected to PJ2017 on the system board, and the
modem cable is connected to PJ1003 on the system board and the connector of the
MDC.
MDC
(Modem daughter card)

PJ2017
System Board
PJ1003

Modem cable

If a connector is disconnected, connect it firmly and repeat Procedure 1. If the
Modem is still not functioning properly, perform Check 2.
Check 2

The MDC or modem cable may be defective or damaged. Replace it with a new
one following the steps in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the modem is
still not functioning properly, perform Check 3.

Check 3

The system board may be defective or damaged. Replace the system board with a
new one following the steps in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.

2-48

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2.12 LAN Troubleshooting

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2.12 LAN Troubleshooting
This section describes how to determine if the computer's LAN is functioning properly.
Perform Procedure 1.
Procedure 1: Connector Check and Replacement Check
Procedure 1

Connector Check and Replacement Check

An RJ45 jack with LAN cable is connected to the system board. If the LAN malfunctions,
the system board might be damaged.
Disassemble the computer following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement
Procedures and perform the following check:
Check 1

Make sure the RJ-45 jack is firmly connected to PJ4500 on the system board.

If a connector is disconnected, connect it firmly and repeat Procedure 1. If the
LAN port is still not functioning properly, perform Check 2.
Check 2

The RJ-45 jack may be defective or damaged. Replace the RJ-45 jack with a new
one. If the LAN port is still not functioning properly, perform Check 3.

Check 3

The system board may be defective or damaged. Replace the system board with a
new one following the steps in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2-49

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2.13 Bluetooth Troubleshooting

2.13 Bluetooth Troubleshooting
This section describes how to determine if the computer's Bluetooth is functioning properly.
Perform the steps below starting with Procedure 1 and continuing with the other procedures
as required.
Procedure 1: Transmitting- Receiving Check
Procedure 2: Antennas' Connection Check
Procedure 3: Antenna Check
Procedure 4: Replacement Check

Procedure 1

Transmitting-Receiving Check

Make sure the wireless switch on the le ft side of the computer is turned ON. If it is not, slide
the switch toward the back of the computer to turn it on.
Check 1

Execute test program ICH_BT73.EXE to check the BD_ADDR of the Bluetooth.
Perform the test following the instructions described in Chapter 3, Bluetooth Test
Program (ICH_BT73.EXE).
If the computer passes the test, the function is correctly working. If the computer
does not pass the test, the Bluetooth board may be disconnected or damaged.
Make sure the connector on the Bluetooth board is firmly connected to PJ4900 on
the system board. And perform the test program ICH_BT73.EXE again.
If the computer still does not pass the test, go to check 3.

Check 2

Execute test program ICH_BT53.EXE to check the transmitting-receiving
function of the Bluetooth. You will need a second computer that can
communicate by the Bluetooth. Perform the test following the instructions
described in Chapter 3, Bluetooth Test Program (ICH_BT53.EXE).
If the computer passes the test, the function is correctly working.
If the computer does not pass the test, go to check 3.

Check 3

The Bluetooth board may be defective or damaged. Replace it with a new one.
And perform the test program again.
If the computer still does not pass the test, go to Procedure 2.

2-50

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2.13 Bluetooth Troubleshooting

Procedure 2

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Antennas' Connection Check

The Bluetooth function wiring diagram is shown below:

Any of the connections may be disconnected. Disassemble the computer following the steps
described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures, and perform the following checks:
Check 1

Make sure the wireless communication switch on the side of the computer is set to
“On”.
If the switch is set to “Off”, turn it “On”. If the Bluetooth module is still not
functioning properly, perform Check 2.

Check 2

Make sure the Bluetooth module is firmly connected to PJ4900 on the system
board.
If the connector is disconnected, connect it firmly and perform Procedure 1. If the
Bluetooth module is still not functioning properly, perform Check 3.

Check 3

Make sure the Bluetooth antenna cable (brown) is firmly connected to the
Bluetooth module.
If the Bluetooth antenna cable is disconnected, connect it firmly and perform
Procedure 1. If the Bluetooth function is still not functioning properly, go to
Procedure 3.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2-51

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Procedure 3
Check 1

2.13 Bluetooth Troubleshooting

Antenna Check

Use an antenna test cable to check the antennas' connection. Follow the steps
below:
1. Remove the Bluetooth slot cover and lift it off. Refer to Chapter 4,
Replacement Procedures, for detailed steps of disassembling.
2. Disconnect the Bluetooth antenna cable connected to the Bluetooth module.
3. Connect the end of the antenna test cable to the multimeter.
4. Connect the Bluetooth antenna cable to the antenna test cable. One clip is
connected to the end of the Bluetooth antenna cable. The other is connected to
the opposite side of the Bluetooth antenna cable.
5. Determine the resistance. The cable passes the test when the resistance is less
than 5Ω. If it is more than 5Ω, the Bluetooth antenna cable fails the test.

Figure 2-3 Antenna Test cable
NOTE:

1.

The resistances determined with the steps above may not be stable with other
machines because of "cable loss," which varies according to the length of the
cable. The impedance of the antenna itself is about 0.5-0.8 ohm.

2.

The above steps cannot accurately determine the impedance of the antenna.
Use an LC meter for a precise measure of impedance.

If the Bluetooth antenna cable pass the test, connect it to the Bluetooth module and cover the
slo t, then perform Procedure 1.
If the Bluetooth antenna cable does not pass the test, go to Procedure 4.

2-52

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2.13 Bluetooth Troubleshooting

Procedure 4

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Replacement Check

Check 1

The Bluetooth module may be defective or damaged. Replace the Bluetooth
module with a new one following the steps in Chapter 4, Replacement
Procedures. If the Bluetooth is still not functioning properly, perform Check 2.

Check 2

The system board may be defective or damaged. Replace the system board with a
new one following the steps in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2-53

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2.14 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting

2.14 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting
This section describes how to determine if the computer's Wireless LAN is functioning
properly. Perform the steps below starting with Procedure 1 and continuing with the other
procedures as required.
Procedure 1: Transmitting- Receiving Check
Procedure 2: Antennas' Connection Check
Procedure 3: Antennas' Capability Check
Procedure 4: Replacement Check

Procedure 1

Transmitting-Receiving Check

Make sure the wireless switch on the left side of the computer is turned ON. If it is not, slide
the switch toward the back of the computer to turn it on.
Check 1

Execute the test program to check the transmitting-receiving function of the
wireless LAN. You will need a second computer that can communicate by the
wireless LAN. Perform the test following the instructions described in Section
3.16-18, Wireless LAN Test Program .
If the computer passes the test, the function is correctly working.
If the computer does not pass the test, perform Procedure 2.

2-54

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2.14 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting
Procedure 2

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Antennas' Connection Check

The wireless LAN wiring diagram is shown below:

Any of the connections may be disconnected. Disassemble the computer following the steps
described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures, and perform the following checks:
Check 1

Make sure the wireless communication switch is “On”.
If the switch is “Off”, turn it “On”. If the Bluetooth module is still not
functioning properly, perform Check 2.

Check 2

Make sure the wireless LAN board is firmly connected to PJ2015 on the system
board.
If the connector is disconnected, connect it firmly and perform Procedure 1. If the
wireless LAN board is still not functioning properly, perform Check 3.

Check 3

Make sure the wireless LAN antenna cables (black and white) are firmly
connected to the wireless LAN board.
If the wireless LAN antenna cables are disconnected, connect them firmly and
perform Procedure 1. If the wireless LAN function is still not functioning
properly, go to Procedure 3.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2-55

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Procedure 3
Check 1

2.14 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting

Antenna Check

Use an antenna test cable to check the antennas' connection. Follow the steps
below:
1. Remove the wireless LAN slot cover and lift it off. Refer to Chapter 4,
Replacement Procedures, for detailed steps of disassembling.
2. Disconnect the wireless LAN antenna cables connected to the wireless LAN
board.
3. Connect the end of the antenna test cable to the multimeter.
4. Connect the Main antenna cable to the antenna test cable. One clip is
connected to the end of the antenna cable. The other is connected to the
opposite side of the antenna cable.
5. Determine the resistance. The cable passes the test when the resistance is less
than 5 ohm. If it is more than 5 ohm, the Bluetooth antenna cable fails the test.
6. Change the antenna cable. Perform from step 3 to check the black antenna
cable.

Figure 2-4 Antenna Test cable
NOTE:

1.

The resistances determined with the steps above may not be stable with other
machines because of "cable loss," which varies according to the length of the
cable. The impedance of the antenna itself is about 0.5-0.8 ohm.

2.

The above steps cannot accurately determine the impedance of the antenna.
Use an LC meter for a precise measure of impedance.

If the wireless LAN antenna cables pass the test, connect them to the wireless LAN board
and cover the slot, then perform Procedure 1.
If the wireless LAN antenna cables do not pass the test, replace the wireless LAN antenna
cables with new ones following the steps in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the
wireless LAN is still not functioning properly, go to Procedure 4.

2-56

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2.14 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting
Procedure 4

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Replacement Check

The wireless LAN board, and the system board are connected to the circuits. Any of these
components may be damaged. Refer to Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures, for instruc tions
on how to disassemble the computer and then perform the following checks:
Check 1

The wireless LAN board may be defective or damaged. Replace the board with a
new one following the steps in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the
problem still exists, perform Check2.

Check 2

The system board may be defective or damaged. Replace the board with a new
one following the instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures and test the
display again.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2-57

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2.15 Sound Troubleshooting

2.15 Sound Troubleshooting
This section describes how to determine if the computer's sound functions are functioning
properly. Perform the steps below starting with Procedure 1 and continuing with the other
procedures as required.
Procedure 1: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 2: Connector Check
Procedure 3: Replacement Check
Procedure 1

Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check

The Sound/Modem test program is stored on the computer ’s diagnostic disk. Insert the
Diagnostics disk in the computer's floppy disk drive, turn on the computer and run the t est.
Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics, for details.
If an error is detected, go to Procedure 2.

2-58

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2.15 Sound Troubleshooting

Procedure 2

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Connector Check

The sound function wiring diagram is shown below:

Any of the connections may be disconnected. Disassemble the computer following the steps
described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures and perform the following checks:
If the stereo speakers do not work correctly, perform Check 1.
If the headphone do not work correctly, perform Check 2.
If the microphone does not work correctly, perform Check 3.
Check 1

If the stereo speakers do not work properly, the speaker cables may be
disconnected. Make sure the right speaker cable is firmly connected to PJ2026 on
the system board and the left speaker cable is firmly connected to PJ2027 on the
system board. If the stereo speakers are still not functioning properly, go to
Procedure 3.

Check 2

If the headphone do not work properly, the headphone cable may be disconnected.
Make sure the headphone cable is firmly connected to PJ3003 on the system
board. If the sound function still does not work properly, replace it with a new
one. Go to Procedure 3.

Check 3

If the microphone function does not work properly, the internal microphone cable
or external microphone cable may be disconnected. When the internal
microphone malfunctions, make sure the internal microphone cable is firmly
connected to PJ3001 on the sound board, and PJ3000 on the sound board is firmly
connected to PJ1100 on the system board. When using the external microphone,
make sure the external microphone cable is firmly connected to PJ3002 on the
system board. If the microphone is still not functioning properly, go to Procedure
3.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2-59

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Procedure 3

2.15 Sound Troubleshooting

Replacement Check

Check 1

If the stereo speakers do not sound properly, the right or left speaker may be
defective or damaged. Replace it with a new one. If the stereo speakers still do not
work properly, go to Check 5.

Check 2

If the headphone don't sound properly, the headphone jack may be defective or
damaged. Replace it with a new one. If the sound function still does not work
properly, go to Check 5.

Check 3

If the microphone does not work properly, the microphone cable may be defective
or damaged. Replace it with a new one. If the microphone still does not work
properly, go to Check 4.

Check 4

The sound board or system board may be defective or damaged. Replace it with a
new one.

2-60

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2.16 SD Card Slot Troubleshooting

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2.16 SD Card Slot Troubleshooting
To check if the SD card/Smart Media slot is good or no good, follow the troubleshooting
procedures below as instructed.
Procedure 1: Check on Windows
Procedure 2: Connector/Replacement Check
Procedure 1

Check on Windows

Insert an SD card into the slot. Check if the installed Windows recognizes automatically the
SD card and the data in the SD card can be read.
If the card is not recognized or data are not red, go to Procedure 2.
Procedure 2

Connector/Replacement Check

The SD card is connected to PJ1514 on the system board.

Check 1

The SD card and the system board may be disconnected. Make sure the SD card is
firmly inserted to PJ1514 on the system board. If not, insert it firmly. If the SD
card is still not functioning properly, perform Check 2.

Check 2

The SD card may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the step in
Chapter 4. If the problem continues, perform Check 3.

Check 3

The system board may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the step in
Chapter 4.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

2-61

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2-62

2.16 SD Card Slot Troubleshooting

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

Chapter 3
Tests and Diagnostics

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3-ii

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

3 Tests and Diagnostics

Chapter 3

Contents

3.1

The Diagnostic Test...................................................................................................... 3-1

3.2

Executing the Diagnostic Test ....................................................................................... 3-3

3.3

Subtest Names............................................................................................................. 3-7

3.4

System Test ............................................................................................................... 3-10

3.5

Memory Test............................................................................................................. 3-13

3.6

Keyboard Test........................................................................................................... 3-15

3.7

Display Test............................................................................................................... 3-19

3.8

Floppy Disk Test ....................................................................................................... 3-23

3.9

Printer Test ................................................................................................................ 3-25

3.10

Async Test................................................................................................................. 3-27

3.11

Hard Disk Test .......................................................................................................... 3-29

3.12

Real Timer Test.......................................................................................................... 3-32

3.13

NDP Test .................................................................................................................. 3-34

3.14

Expansion Test........................................................................................................... 3-35

3.15

CD-ROM/DVD-ROM Test ...................................................................................... 3-36

3.16

Wireless LAN Test (Agere) ....................................................................................... 3-37

3.17

Wireless LAN Test (Atheros)..................................................................................... 3-42

3.18

Wireless LAN Test (Caelxico) ................................................................................... 3-45

3.19

Sound/Modem Test ................................................................................................... 3-46

3.20

IEEE1394 Test .......................................................................................................... 3-50

3.21

Bluetooth Test............................................................................................................ 3-52

3.22

Error Code and Error Status Names........................................................................... 3-61

3.23

Hard Disk Test Detail Status ...................................................................................... 3-64

3.24

Head Cleaning ........................................................................................................... 3-66

3.25

3.24.1

Function Description............................................................................. 3-66

3.24.2

Operations ........................................................................................... 3-66

Log Utilities................................................................................................................ 3-67
3.25.1

Function Description............................................................................. 3-67

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3-iii

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.25.2
3.26

3.27

3.28

3.29

Operations ........................................................................................... 3-67

Running Test.............................................................................................................. 3-69
3.26.1

Function Description............................................................................. 3-69

3.26.2

Operations ........................................................................................... 3-69

Floppy Disk Drive Utilities.......................................................................................... 3-71
3.27.1

Function Description............................................................................. 3-71

3.27.2

Operations ........................................................................................... 3-72

System Configuration................................................................................................. 3-76
3.28.1

Function Description............................................................................. 3-76

3.28.2

Operations ........................................................................................... 3-77

SETUP ...................................................................................................................... 3-78
3.29.1

Function Description............................................................................. 3-78

3.29.2

Accessing the SETUP Program............................................................. 3-80

Tables
Table 3-1

Subtest names.................................................................................................. 3-7

Table 3-2

Error code for Bluetooth test (BD_ADDR)..................................................... 3-55

Table 3-3

Error code for Bluetooth test (BD_ADDR of the DUT) .................................. 3-59

Table 3-4

Error codes and error status names................................................................. 3-61

Table 3-5

Hard disk controller status register contents .................................................... 3-64

Table 3-6

Error register contents .................................................................................... 3-65

3-iv

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

3.1 The Diagnostic Test

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3

3.1

The Diagnostic Test

This chapter explains how to use the Diagnostic Test program to test the functions of the computer’s
hardware modules. The Diagnostic Test Program is stored on the Diagnostic Disk. The Diagnostic
Test program consists of eight programs that are grouped into the Service Program Module
(DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU).
NOTE: To start the diagnostics, follow these steps:
1. Check all cables for loose connections.
2. Exit any application you may be using and close Windows.
The DIAGNOSTIC MENU consists of the following eight functions.
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q

DIAGNOSTIC TEST
HEAD CLEANING
LOG UTILITIES
RUNNING TEST
FDD UTILITIES
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
EXIT TO MS-DOS
SETUP

The DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU contains the following eleven functional tests:
q SYSTEM TEST
q MEMORY TEST
q KEYBOARD TEST
q DISPLAY TEST
q FLOPPY DISK TEST
q PRINTER TEST
q ASYNC TEST
q HARD DISK TEST
q REAL TIMER TEST
q NDP TEST
q EXPANSION TEST
q CD-ROM/DVD-ROM TEST
Other tests as follows
q WIRELESS LAN (Agere) TEST
q WIRELESS LAN (Atheros) TEST

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3-1

3 Tests and Diagnostics
q
q
q
q

3.1 The Diagnostic Test

WIRELESS LAN (Calexico) TEST
SOUND/MODEM TEST
IEEE1394 TEST
BLUETOOTH TEST

You will need the following equipment to perform some of the Diagnostic test programs.
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q

The Diagnostics Disk (all tests)
A formatted working disk for the floppy disk drive test
An external FDD attachment
A cleaning kit to clean the floppy disk drive heads (Head Cleaning)
A cleaning kit to clean the DVD-ROM drive heads (Head Cleaning)
A PC card wraparound connector for the I/O card test (Expansion test)
(Rev.B or higher)
A printer wraparound connector for the printer wraparound test (Printer test)
A CD test media (TOSHIBA CD-ROM TEST DISK ZA1217P01/P000204190)
(CD-ROM/DVD-ROM test)
A DVD test media (Toshiba-EMI DVD-ROM TEST DISK TSD-1) (CD-ROM/DVDROM test)
CD-RW media that supports four-speed writing (media manufactured by RICOH or
Mitsubishi Chemical are recommended.)
External CRT (Display test)
PS/2 or compatible keyboard (Keyboard test)
PS/2 or compatible mouse (Keyboard test)
Serial port wraparound connector (ASYNC test)
Headphone (Sound test)
CD-ROM drive (CD-ROM test)
A microphone
A modular cable and RJ11 connector checker
A modular cable and RJ11 connector checker (LED)
USB test module and USB cable
LAN wraparound connector
Music CD (CD-ROM/DVD-ROM test)
An access point and a cross cable (Wireless LAN (Calexico) test)

The following sections detail the tests within the Diagnostic Test function of the DIAGNOSTIC
TEST MENU. Refer to Sections 3.24 through 3.29 for detailed information on the remaining
Service Program Module functions.

3-2

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

3.2 Executing the Diagnostic Test

3.2

3 Tests and Diagnostics

Executing the Diagnostic Test

Toshiba MS-DOS is required to run the DIAGNOSTICS TEST PROGRAM. To start the
DIAGNOSTIC TEST PROGRAM, follow these steps:
1. Insert the Diagnostics disk in the floppy disk drive and turn on the computer while pressing
U.
(The Diagnostics Disk contains the MS-DOS boot files.)
NOTE: To execute the CD-ROM or DVD-ROM test, make sure the CD-ROM and
CD-ROM drive or DVD-ROM and DVD-ROM drive is installed in the computer.
The following menu will appear:

NOTE: To exit the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Esc. If a test program is in
progress, press Ctrl + Break to exit the test program , or press Ctrl + C to stop the test
program .

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3-3

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.2 Executing the Diagnostic Test

2. To execute the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU from the DIAGNOSTICS MENU, set the
highlight bar to 1, and press Enter. The following DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU will
appear:
TOSHIBA Personal Computer XXXX DIAGNOSTICS
Version X.XX (c) Copyright TOSHIBA Corp. XXXX
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU :
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
88
99

–
–
–
–
–
-

SYSTEM TEST
MEMORY TEST
KEYBOARD TEST
DISPLAY TEST
FLOPPY DISK TEST
PRINTER TEST
ASYNC TEST
HARD DISK TEST
REAL TIMER TEST
NDP TEST
EXPANSION TEST
CD-ROM/DVD-ROM TEST
ERROR RETRY COUNT SET [FDD & HDD]
EXIT TO DIAGNOSTICS MENU

Refer to sections 3.4 through 3.15 for detailed descriptions of each Diagnostic Tests 1
through 13. Function 88 sets the floppy disk drive and hard disk drive error retry count.
Function 99 exits the submenus of the Diagnostic Test and returns to the Diagnostic Menu.

3-4

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

3.2 Executing the Diagnostic Test

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3. Select the option you want to execute and press Enter. When “1-SYSTEM TEST” is
selected, the following message will appear:
SYSTEM TEST

SUB-TEST :
PASS COUNT:
WRITE DATA:
ADDRESS
:

XXXXXXX

XX
XXXXX
XX
XXXXXX

XXXX DIAGNOSTIC TEST VX.XX
[Ctrl]+[Break] : test end
[Ctrl]+[C]
: key stop

ERROR COUNT: XXXXX
READ DATA : XX
TATUS
: XXX

SUB-TEST MENU :
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
99

–
–
–
-

ROM checksum

Fan ON/OFF
Gerserville
Quick charge
DMI read
DMI write
CPU Temperature
Exit to DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU

NOTE: The menu displayed by your computer may be slightly different from the
one shown above.
4. Select the desired subtest number from the subtest menu and press Enter. The following
message will appear:
TEST LOOP : YES/NO

Selecting YES increases the pass counter by one, each time the test cycle ends and restarts
the test cycle.
Selecting NO returns the subtest menu to the main menu after the test is complete.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3-5

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.2 Executing the Diagnostic Test

5. The following message will appear:
ERROR STOP : YES/NO

Then, use the left or right arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired option and press
Enter.
Selecting YES stops the test program when an error is found and displays the operation
guide on the right side of the display screen as shown below:
ERROR STATUS NAME

[[ HALT OPERATION ]]
1: Test end
2: Continue
3: Retry

These three selections have the following functions respectively:
1. Terminates the test program and exits to the subtest menu.
2. Continues the test.
3. Restarts the test from the error.
Selecting NO keeps the test running even if an error is found.
6. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired option and press Enter.
Table 3-1 in section 3.3 describes the function of each test on the subtest menu. Table 3-4
in section 3.21 describes the error codes and error status for each error.

3-6

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

3.3 Subtest Names

3.3

3 Tests and Diagnostics

Subtest Names

Table 3-1 lists the subtest names for each test program in the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU.
Table 3-1 Subtest names (1/3)
No.
1

2

3

4

5

6

Test Name
SYSTEM

MEMORY

KEYBOARD

DISPLAY

FLOPPY DISK

PRINTER

Subtest No.

Subtest Name

01

ROM checksum

04

Fan ON/OFF

05

Gerserville

06

Quick charge

07

DMI read

08

DMI write

09

CPU Temperature

01

Conventional memory

02

Protected mode

03

PS/2 Mouse connect check

04

Touch Pad/IPS

06

Stress

01

Pressed key display

02

Pressed key code display

03

PS/2 Mouse connect check

04

Touch Pad/IPS

05

USB test

07

InTouch/Presentation key

01

VRAM read/write for VGA

02

Gradation for VGA

03

Gradation for LCD

04

Gradation & Mode test for VGA

05

All dot on / off for LCD

06

“H” pattern display

07

LCD Brightness

01

Sequential read

02

Sequential read/write

03

Random address/data

04

Write specified address

05

Read specified address

01

Ripple pattern

02

Function

03

Wrap around

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3-7

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.3 Subtest Names

Table 3-1 Subtest names (2/3)
No.
7

8

9

ASYNC

HARD DISK

REAL TIMER

Subtest No.

Subtest Name

01

Wrap around (board)

02

Point to point (send)

03

Point to point (receive)

04

Interrupt test

06

FIR/SIR Point to point (send)

07

FIR/SIR Point to point (receive)

01

Sequential read

02

Address uniqueness

03

Random address/data

04

Cross talk & peak shift

06

Write specified address

07

Read specified address

09

Sequential write

10

W-R-C specified address

01

Real time

02

Backup memory

03

Real time carry

10

NDP

01

NDP test

11

EXPANSION

01

PCMCIA wrap around

03

RGB monitor ID

01

Sequential read

02

Read specified address

03

Random address/data

04

Playback music

07

RW 1point W/R/C

13

-

-

-

3-8

Test Name

CD-ROM/DVDROM

1

Transmit & Receive test [Responder]

2

MAC Address test [Mini-PCI Wireless LAN]

3

Wireless LAN (WEP64/128) test

0

Transmit & Receive test [Initiator]

Wireless LAN
(Atheros)

1

Test PC [Initiator]

0

[Responder]

Wireless LAN

1

Communication test

2

MAC address test

1

Microphone recording & play

2

Sin wave

4

Modem

1

IEEE1394 test

Wireless LAN
(Agere)

SOUND/
MODEM

IEEE1394

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

3.3 Subtest Names

3 Tests and Diagnostics

2

Responder test

3

ID check

Table 3-1 Subtest names (3/3)

No.
-

Test Name
Bluetooth

Subtest No.

Subtest Name

1

BD_ADDR check

2

Communication test

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3-9

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.4

3.4 System Test

System Test

To execute the System Test select 1 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter and
follow the directions on the screen. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to execute and
press Enter.
Subtest 01

ROM Checksum
This subtest executes a checksum test of the BIOS ROM on the System Board.

Subtest 04

Fan On/Off
This subtest checks CPU fan operation using the on/off command. The following
message will appear when this subtest is executed. Make sure the fan does not
rotate and press Enter.
*** Test Fan Revolution 0000RPM Start

The following message will appear. Make sure the fan rotates at low speed and
press Enter.
*** Test Fan Revolution Low speed start

The following message will appear. Make sure the fan rotates at high speed and
press Enter.
*** Test Fan Revolution High speed start

Subtest 05

Gerserville
If the CPU supports Gerserville (SpeedStep), this Subtest checks that the CPU
operating clock speed can be changed.

Subtest 06

Quick charge
This subtest checks the status for the quick charge.

Subtest 07

DMI read
Reads the factory setting for the serial and DMI numbers.
Model Name
Version Number
Serial Number
Model Number
PCN/BND Number
UUID Number

3-10

:
:
:
:
:
:

XXXXXX
XXXXXX-XXXXX
XXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXX-XXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

3.4 System Test

3 Tests and Diagnostics

To exit this subtest and return to the SYSTEM TEST menu, press Enter.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3-11

3 Tests and Diagnostics

Subtest 08

3.4 System Test

DMI write
The following messages appear in order. When this subtest is executed. Input each
information. (If you do not replace the PCB, the DMI information should not be
changed.)
1. “Enter Model Name ? ” is displayed.
Input the computer’s model name and press Enter. (e.g. TECRA M1)
2. “Enter Version Number ? ”
Input the computer’s version number and press Enter. (e.g. PS245UAAA13)
3. “Enter Serial Number ? ”
Input the computer’s serial number and press Enter. (e.g. Z2020855JU)
4. “Enter Model Number ?”
Input the computer’s sales model number and press Enter. (e.g. PS245UAAA13)
5. “Enter Bundle Number ? ”
Input the computer’s PCN/Bundle number and press Enter. (e.g.
PCN1190CCZ01/S3A1320D990)
6. “Write data OK (Y/N) ? ”
When Y is press, the DMI information is written to the Flash-ROM.

3-12

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

3.4 System Test

Subtest 09

3 Tests and Diagnostics

CPU Temperature
This subtest measures the CPU temperature to see if the cooling functions of the
computer are effectively working.
When the subtest starts, the following message appears on the display:
CPU TEMP =

XX deg C

Throttling level = XXXXh

The number of the CPU TEMP indicates the CPU temperature at the moment in
decimal notation. For example, if the number is 57, the CPU temperature is 57
degrees.
The number of “Throttling level” indicates how much the CPU has slowed. This
number takes one of the following three values:
0000h : The CPU is running full speed.
4000h : The CPU has slowed to 75% of its maximum speed.
8000h : The CPU has slowed to 50% of its maximum speed.
The subtest displays the message five times at intervals of one minute; therefore, it
takes five minutes to complete the test. The computer passes the test if the CPU
temperature is less than 70 degrees at the end of the test. If the temperature is 70
degrees or more, the computer fails the test, and an error message appears on the
display.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3-13

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.5

3.5 Memory Test

Memory Test

To execute the Memory Test, select 2 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter and
follow the directions on the screen. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to execute and
press Enter.
Subtest 01

Conventional memory
This subtest writes constant data to conventional memory (0 to 640 KB), then
reads the new data and compares the result with the original data.

Subtest 02

Protected Mode

NOTE: The CONFIG.SYS file must be configured without expanded memory manager
programs such as EMM386.EXE, EMM386.SYS or QEMM386.SYS. Also, the HIMEM.SYS
must be deleted from the CONFIG.SYS file.
This subtest writes constant data and address data to extended memory (maximum
address 100000h) then reads the new data and compares the result with the original
data.
The constant data is FFh, AAh, 55h, and 00h.

3-14

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

3.5 Memory Test

Subtest 04

3 Tests and Diagnostics

Cache Memory
To test the cache memory, a pass-through write-read comparison of ‘5A’ data is
run repeatedly to the test area (‘7000’:‘Program’ size to ‘7000’:‘7FFF’ (32 KB))
to check the hit-miss ratio (on/off status) for CPU cache memory. One test takes 3
seconds.
Number of misses < Number of hits → OK
Number of misses ≥ Number of hits → Fail

Subtest 05

L2 Cache Memory
To test the L2 cache memory, a test similar to that for the cache memory is
performed.

Subtest 06

Stress
The conventional memory is provided with a write/read buffer (size 1b30 h) and
creates write data in the write buffer. Subsequent to 1 MB, the data is written in the
write buffer and is read into the read buffer, followed by a data comparison up to
the maximum memory size.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3-15

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.6

3.6 Keyboard Test

Keyboard Test

To execute the Keyboard Test, select 3 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter and
follow the directions on the screen. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to execute and
press Enter.
Subtest 01

Pressed Key Display
NOTE: The Num Lock and the Overlay mode must be off to execute
this subtest.
When you execute this subtest, the keyboard layout is drawn on the display as
shown below. When any key is pressed, the corresponding key on the screen
changes to the key that was pressed. Holding a key down enables the auto-repeat
function, which causes the key’s display character to blink.

To exit this subtest, press Del + Enter.

Subtest 02

Pressed Key Code Display
When a key is pressed, the scan code, character code, and key top name are
displayed on the screen in the format shown below. The Ins, Caps Lock, Num
Lock, Scroll Lock, Alt, Ctrl, Left Shift, and Right Shift keys are
displayed in reverse screen mode when pressed. The scan codes, character codes,
and key top names are shown in Appendix D.
KEYBOARD TEST

IN PROGRESS

Scan code
Character code
Keytop
Ins Lock
Alt

Caps Lock
Ctrl

302000

=
=
=

Num Lock
Left Shift

Scroll Lock
Right Shift

PRESS [Enter] KEY

3-16

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

3.6 Keyboard Test

Subtest 03

3 Tests and Diagnostics

PS/2 Mouse Connect Check
NOTE: To execute the PS/2 mouse connect check, a PS/2 mouse must be
connected to the computer before the power is turned on.
This subtest checks whether a PS/2 mouse is connected or not.
If this test does not detect an error, it returns to the subtest menu.
If this test detects an error, the following message appears.
DATA COMPARE ERROR
[[ HALT OPERATION ]]
1: Test end
2: Continue
3: Retry

Subtest 04

Touch Pad/IPS
This subtest checks the functions of the pointing stick as shown below.
A) Touch Pad/IPS stick pressure sensing direction and parameter.
B) Touch Pad/IPS switch function check.
This test reports the pointing stick motion response from the IPS and IPS switch.
When the stick is pressed towards the upper left, the  display
changes according to the following illustration. If an IPS switch is pressed, the
 displays appear on the right side one by one. The parameters appear on
the center of the display. To exit this subtest, press the four IPS switches at the
same time.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3-17

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.6 Keyboard Test

< BUTTONS >

< BUTTONS >

3-18

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

3.6 Keyboard Test

3 Tests and Diagnostics

To check only the USB mouse, follow the procedures below:
Connect the USB mouse to the computer’s USB connector.
Next, set up the computer’s hardware as follows:
PERIPHERAL
Internal Pointing Device = Simultaneous
USB Legacy Emulation = Enabled

Then, perform the Pointing Stick Diagnostic Test and make sure:
•
•

The cursor moves in the direction that you move the USB mouse.
The display reverses when you click the right button or left button

To stop this test, press the two IPS buttons on the computer at the same time. (You
cannot use the USB mouse to stop the test.)

Subtest 05

USB Test
This Subtest checks USB. The USB TEST Module (ZD0003P01) and USB Cable
(ZD0003P02) must be connected to the computer.
The following message will appear. Select a port to test and press Enter.
Test port number select (1:Port0, 2:Port1, 3:Port2) ?

If the test ends successfully, OK is displayed. If nothing is displayed, there may be a
problem with the USB port. Check the wraparound connection and repeat the test.
Subtest 07

InTouch/Presentation key
When this subtest displays messages shown below in order, press the
corresponding button.
NOTE: This subtest must be completed within 10 seconds.
Press [ InTouch ] key
Press [ Presentation ] key

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3-19

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.7

3.7 Display Test

Display Test

To execute the Display Test, select 4 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter and
follow the directions on the screen. The Display test contains seven subtests that test the display in
various modes. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to execute and press Enter.
Subtest 01

VRAM Read/Write for VGA
This subtest writes constant data AAh and 55h and address data to video RAM
8MB. This data is then read from the video RAM and compared to the original
data.

Subtest 02

Gradation for VGA
This subtest displays four colors: red, green, blue and white from left to right across
the screen from black to maximum brightness. The display below appears on the
screen when this subtest is executed.

To exit this subtest and return to the DISPLAY TEST menu, press Enter.
Subtest 03

Gradation for LCD
This subtest displays several horizontal bands of multiple color, followed by red,
green and blue bars. Each bar displays black on the top and the brightest color at
the bottom.
Next, this subtest displays full screen of eight colors: red, semi-red, green, semigreen, blue, semi-blue, white, and semi-white.
Each color displays for three seconds.

3-20

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

3.7 Display Test

Subtest 04

3 Tests and Diagnostics

Gradation & Mode test for VGA
This subtest displays gradations for each mode. Execute the test, then press Enter
to change the mode.
The display below appears on the screen when this subtest is executed.
Pressing Enter changes the size of the displayed image.

Pressing Enter changes the size of the displayed image.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3-21

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.7 Display Test

Pressing Enter changes the size of the displayed image.

Pressing Enter changes the size of the displayed image in the following order:
Mode 111
Mode 112
Mode 114
Mode 115
Mode 117

640*480
640*480
800*600
800*600
1024*768

64K
16M
64K
16M
64K

To exit this subtest and return to the DISPLAY TEST menu, press Ctrl + Break.

3-22

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

3.7 Display Test

Subtest 05

3 Tests and Diagnostics

All Dot On /Off for LCD
This subtest displays an all-white screen (all dots on) for three seconds then an allblack screen (all dots off) for three seconds.

Subtest 06

“H” Pattern Display
This subtest displays a full screen of “H” patterns.
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH

To exit this subtest and return to the DISPLAY TEST menu, Ctrl + Break.
NOTE: The last row may not be completely filled. This condition does not
indicate a error.
Subtest 07

LCD Brightness
The LCD brightness changes in the following order:
Super-Bright -> Bright -> Semi-Bright -> Bright -> Super-Bright
The display switches automatically every three seconds and returns to the
DISPLAY TEST menu.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3-23

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.8

3.8 Floppy Disk Test

Floppy Disk Test

NOTE: Before running the floppy disk test, prepare a formatted work disk. Remove the
Diagnostics Disk and insert the work disk into the FDD. Otherwise, the contents of the
floppy disk will be erased.
To execute the Floppy Disk Test, select 5 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter.
1. The following messages will appear. Specify the start track of the floppy disk drive to be tested.
Test start track (Enter:0/dd:00-79)?
2. The Floppy Disk test contains five subtests that test the FDD.
The floppy disk test menu will appear after you select FDD test parameters.
SUB-TEST MENU:
01-Sequential read
02-Sequential read/write
03-Random address/data
04-Write specified address
05-Read specified address
99-Exit to DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU

Select the number of the subtest you want to execute and press Enter. The following message will
appear during the floppy disk test.
Floppy Disk

XXXXXXX

SUB-TEST :XX
PASS COUNT:XXXXX
ERROR
COUNT:XXXXX
WRITE DATA:XX
READ DATA :XX
ADDRESS
:XXXXXX STATUS
:XXX

3-24

xxx DIAGNOSTIC TEST VX.XX
[Ctrl]+[Break] ; test end
[Ctrl]+[C]
; key stop

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

3.8 Floppy Disk Test

Subtest 01

3 Tests and Diagnostics

Sequential read
This subtest performs a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) that continuously reads
all the tracks (track: 0 to 39/0 to 79) on a floppy disk.
The start track is specified at the start of the FDD test. Refer to 1. in this section.

Subtest 02

Sequential read/write
This subtest continuously writes data pattern B5ADADh to all the tracks (track: 0
to 39/0 to 79) on a floppy disk. The data is then read and compared to the original
data.

Subtest 03

Random address/data
This subtest writes random data to random addresses on all tracks (track: 0 to 39/0
to 79) on a floppy disk. The data is then read and compared to the original data.

Subtest 04

Write specified address
This subtest writes the data specified by an operator to a place pointed by track,
head, and address.

Subtest 05

Read specified address
This subtest reads data from a place pointed by track, head, and address specified
by an operator.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3-25

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.9

3.9 Printer Test

Printer Test

To execute the Printer Test, select 6 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter and
follow the directions on the screen. The Printer Test contains three subtests that test the output of
the printer connected to the computer. The following messages will appear after selecting the Printer
Test from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MEN U. Answer each of the questions with an appropriate
response to execute the test.
NOTE: A Port Replicator and an IBM compatible printer must be connected to the system
to execute this test.
The following message will appear when the printer test is selected:
channel#1 = XXXXh
channel#2 = XXXXh
channel#3 = XXXXh
Select the channel number (1-3) ?

The printer I/O port address is specified by the XXXXh number. The computer supports three
printer channels. Select the printer channel number, and press Enter to execute the selected
subtest.
Subtest 01

Ripple Pattern
This subtest prints characters for codes 20h through 7Eh line-by-line while shifting
one character to the left at the beginning of each new line.

3-26

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

3.9 Printer Test

Subtest 02

3 Tests and Diagnostics

Function
This subtest is for IBM compatible printers, and tests the following functions:
Normal print
Double-width print
Compressed print
Emphasized print
Double-strike print
All characters print
This subtest prints the various print types shown below:

Subtest 03

Wrap around
NOTE: To execute this subtest, a printer wraparound connector must be
connected to the printer port in the Port Replicator. The printer
wraparound connector (34M741986G01) wiring diagram is described in
Appendix F.
This subtest checks the output and bi-directional modes of the data control and
status lines through the parallel port wraparound connector.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3-27

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.10

3.10 Async Test

Async Test

To execute the Async Test, select 7 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter and
follow the directions displayed on the screen. The Async test contains two subtests that test the
asynchronous communication functions. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to execute
and press Enter.
Subtests require the following data format:
Method:
Speed:
Data:
Data pattern:

Asynchronous
9600BPS (Subtests 01 to 04)
38400BPS (Subtests 06, 07)
8 bits and one parity bit (EVEN)
20h to 7Eh

The following message will appear at the bottom of the screen when the subtest 01, 02 or 03 are
selected.
Channel#1 = XXXXh
Channel#2 = XXXXh
Channel#3 = XXXXh
Select the Channel number (1/2/3)

The serial I/O port address is specified by the XXXXh number. Select the serial port channel
number and press Enter to start the subtest.
Subtest 01

Wraparound (board)
NOTE: To execute this subtest an RS -232C wraparound connector
(34M741621G01) must be connected to the RS -232C port. The RS-232C
wraparound connector wiring diagram is described in Appendix F.
This subtest checks the data send/receive function through the wraparound
connector.

Subtest 02

3-28

Point to Point (send)

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3.10 Async Test

3 Tests and Diagnostics

NOTE: To execute this subtest, two machines must be connected with an
RS-232C direct cable. One machine should be set as “send”(subtest 02)
and the other set as “receive” (subtest 03). The wiring diagram for the
RS-232C direct cable is described in Appendix F.
This subtest sends 20h through 7Eh data to the receive side, then receives the sent
data and compares it to the original data.
Subtest 03

Point to Point (receive)
This subtest is used with subtest 02 described above. This subtest receives the data
from the send side, then sends the received data.

Subtest 04

Interrupt Test
This subtest checks the Interrupt Request Level of IRQ 4, 3 and 5 from the send
side.

Subtest 06

FIR/SIR Point to Point (send)
NOTE: To execute subtests 06 and 07, each computer must have access
to the other computer’s infrared port.
This subtest sends 20h through 7Eh data to the receive side, then receives the sent
data and compares it to the original data through the FIR/SIR port.

Subtest 07

FIR/SIR Point to Point (receive)
This subtest is used with subtest 06 described above. This subtest receives the data
from the send side, then sends the received data through the FIR/SIR port.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3-29

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.11

3.11 Hard Disk Test

Hard Disk Test

To execute the Hard Disk Test, select 8 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter, and
follow the directions on the screen. The hard disk test contains ten subtests that test the hard disk
drive functions.
NOTE: To execute the subtest 02,03,04,06,09 or 10, the system requires you to enter
password.
The contents of the hard disk will be erased when the subtest 02, 03, 04, 06,09,
or 10 is executed. Before running the test, the customer should transfer the
contents of the hard disk to floppy disk. If the customer has not or cannot
perform the back-up, create back -up disks as described below.
Check to see if the Microsoft Create System Disks Tools (MSCSD.EXE) still
exists in the System Tools Folder. (This tool can be used only once.) If it exists,
use it to back up the pre-installed software, then use the Backup utility in the
System Tools folder to back up the entire disk, including the user’s files.
Refer to the operating system instructions.

After selecting the hard disk test from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, answer each of the
questions with an appropriate response to execute the test.
1. Select the hard disk drive number to be tested.
Test drive number select (1:HDD#1, 2:HDD#2, 0:HDD1&2)
2. This message is used to select the retry operation when the hard disk controller detects an
error. Select yes or no.
HDC F/W error retry (1:yes, 2:no) ?
3. This message is used to select the error dump operation when a data compare error is
detected. Select yes or no.
Data compare error dump (1:no, 2:yes) ?

4. This message is used to select whether or not the HDD status is displayed on the screen.
The HDD status is described in section 3.19. Select yes or no.
Detail status display (1:no, 2:yes) ?

3-30

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3.11 Hard Disk Test

3 Tests and Diagnostics

5. The Hard Disk Test message will appear after you respond to the Detail Status prompt.
Select the number of the subtest you want to execute and press Enter. The following
message will appear during each subtest.
HARD DISK TEST

XXXXXXX

SUB-TEST
: XX
PASS COUNT : XXXXX
ERROR COUNT
WRITE DATA : XX
READ DATA
ADDRESS
: XXXXXX
STATUS

:XXXXX
:XX
:XXX

The first three digits of the ADDRESS indicate which cylinder is being tested, the fourth
digit indicates the head and the last two digits indicate the sector.
The first digit of the STATUS number indicates the drive being tested and the last two digits
indicate the error status code as explained in Table 3-4.
Subtest 01

Sequential Read
This subtest is a sequential reading of all the tracks on the HDD starting at track 0.
When all the tracks on the HDD have been read, the test starts at the maximum
track and reads the tracks on the HDD sequentially back to track 0.

Subtest 02

Address Uniqueness
This subtest writes unique address data to each sector of the HDD track-by-track.
The data written to each sector is then read and compared with the original data.
There are three ways the HDD can be read:
•
•
•

Subtest 03

Forward sequential
Reverse sequential
Random

Random Address/Data
This subtest writes random data to random addresses on the HDD cylinder, head
and sector. This data is then read and compared to the original data.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3-31

3 Tests and Diagnostics

Subtest 04

3.11 Hard Disk Test

Cross Talk & Peak Shift
This subtest writes eight types of worst pattern data (listed below) to a cylinder,
then reads the data while moving from cylinder to cylinder.

Subtest 06

Worst pattern data

Cylinder

‘B5ADAD’

0 cylinder

‘4A5252’

1 cylinder

‘EB6DB6’

2 cylinder

‘149249’

3 cylinder

’63B63B’

4 cylinder

‘9C49C4’

5 cylinder

‘2DB6DB’

6 cylinder

‘D24924’

7 cylinder

Write Specified Address
This subtest writes specified data to a specified cylinder and head on the HDD.

Subtest 07

Read Specified Address
This subtest reads data that has been written to a specified cylinder and head on the
HDD.

Subtest 09

Sequential Write
This subtest writes specified 2-byte data to all of the cylinders on the HDD.

Subtest 10

W-R-C Specified Address
This subtest writes data to a specified cylinder and head on the HDD, then reads
the data and compares it to the original data.

3-32

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3.12 Real Timer Test

3.12

3 Tests and Diagnostics

Real Timer Test

To execute the Real Timer Test, select 9 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter and
follow the directions on the screen. The real timer test contains three Subtests that test the
computer’s real timer functions. Move the highlight bar to the Subtest you want to execute and
press Enter.
Subtest 01

Real Time
A new date and time can be input during this Subtest. To execute the real time
subtest follow these steps:
1. Select the subtest 01 and the following message will appear:
Current date : XX-XX-XXXX
Current time : XX:XX:XX
Enter new date:
PRESS [ENTER] KEY TO EXIT TEST

2. If the current date is not correct, input the correct date at the “Enter new date”
prompt and press Enter. To enter “:”, press Shift + ;. The date is updated
and the following prompt will appear:
Enter new time :

3. If the current time is not correct, input the correct time in 24-hour format and
press Enter. The time is updated.
Subtest 02

Backup Memory
This Subtest performs the following backup memory check:
Writes 1-bit of “on” data to address 01h through 80h
Writes 1-bit of “off” data to address 0Eh through 80h
Writes the data pattern AAh and 55h to the RTC 114-byte memory
(address 0Eh to 7Fh)

The Subtest reads and compares this data with the original data.
To exit, press Ctrl + Break.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3-33

3 Tests and Diagnostics

Subtest 03

3.12 Real Timer Test

Real Time Carry

CAUTION: When you execute this Subtest, the current date and time are erased.
This Subtest checks the real time clock increments, making sure the date and time
are displayed in the following format:
Current date : 12-31-2001
Current time : 23:59:58
PRESS [Enter] KEY TO EXIT TEST

Press Enter to exit.

3-34

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3.13 NDP Test

3.13

3 Tests and Diagnostics

NDP Test

To execute the NDP test, select 10 from the DIAGNOSTICS TEST MENU, press Enter and
follow the directions on the screen. The NDP test contains one Subtest that tests the computer’s
NDP functions.
Subtest 01

NDP
This test checks the following functions of the coprocessor:
q Control word
q Status word
q Bus
q Addition
q Multiplication
Press Ctrl + Break to exit.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3-35

3.14 Expansion Test

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3

3.14 Expansion Test
To execute the expansion test, select 11 from the DIAGNOSTICS TEST MENU, press Enter and
follow the directions on the screen. The expansion test contains two subtests.
NOTE: To execute this subtest, the PC card wraparound connector is required.
Subtest 01

PCMCIA Wraparound
This test checks the following signal line of the PC card slot:
q Address line
q REG#, CE#1, CE#2 line
q Data line
q Speaker line
q Wait line
q BSY#, BVD1 line
This subtest is executed in the following order:

Sub#

Address

Good

Bad

Contents

01

00001
00001

nn
nn

xx
xx

Address line
REG#, CE#1, CE#2
nn=A0, 90, 80, 00

02

00002

ww

rr

Data line
ww=write data, rr=read data

03

00003

––

––

Speaker line

04

00004

40,80

xx

Wait line (40>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>

< - Progress Bar

[ESC] : Stop

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3-57

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.21 Bluetooth Test

When the Bluetooth test menu is displayed, press T to select the test and press Enter in the test
machine. The following message will appear:
---------------------------------------------------------------------------Bluetooth Subsystem T&D for PCSE(CS-Air) VerX.XX Copyright (C) by TOSHIBA Co.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------+------------------+
|

|

|

Tester

|

|

|

+------------------+

[ESC]:Finish Tester

[SPACE]:Start

Is DUT ready?

Then press Space to start the Bluetooth communication test.
When the machine has passed the test, it displays BD_ADDR of the DUT. If the connection with the
tester is completed, the progress bar stops. The following message is shown.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------Bluetooth Subsystem T&D for PCSE(CS-Air) VerX.XX Copyright (C) by TOSHIBA Co.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------+----------------------+
|

DUT

|

BD_ADDR of the DUT = XXXXXXXXXXXXX [h]

+----------------------+
CCCC
C

OOO
C

O

M
O

M PPPPPP

MM

E

T

E

D

P L

E

T

E

D

D

EEEEEE

T

EEEEEEE D

D

O

O M M M M P

C

O

O M

C

O
C

C
CCCC

O

O
OOO

EEEEEE TTTTTTT EEEEEEE DDDDD

P L

C

M

L

MM P
M PPPPPP

L

D

O M

M P

L

E

T

E

D

M

M P

L

E

T

E

D

D

M

M P

LLLLLLL EEEEEE

T

EEEEEEE DDDDD

D

Testing is finished

3-58

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436 )

3.21 Bluetooth Test

3 Tests and Diagnostics

A>_

If the target machine has any problem, the following message “INCOMPLETE” is displayed with the
Error CODE.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------Bluetooth Subsystem T&D for PCSE(CS-Air) VerX.XX Copyright (C) by TOSHIBA Co.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------+----------------------+
|

DUT

|

BD_ADDR of the DUT = XXXXXXXXXXXXX [h]

+----------------------+

III

N

N

I

NN

N

I

N N

N C

I

N

N C

I

N

N N C

I

N

NN

III

N

N

N

CCCC
C

OOO
C

O

C
CCCC

M PPPPPP

MM

L

EEEEEE TTTTTTT EEEEEEE

MM P

P L

E

T

O

O M M M M P

P L

E

T

E

O

O M

O
C

M
O

O M
O

O
OOO

M

E

M PPPPPP

L

EEEEEE

T

EEEE EEE
E

M P

L

E

T

M

M P

L

E

T

E

M

M P

LLLLLLL EEEEEE

T

EEEEEEE

Testing is finished

_Press any key to continue. . .

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3-59

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.21 Bluetooth Test

If the machine detects a malfunction, it indicates the error code as shown below.
The error code begins with the least significant digit.
Error code
Table 3-3 Error code for Bluetooth test (BD_ADDR of the DUT) (1/2)
Error code
0x01
0x02
0x03
0x04
0x05
0x06
0x07
0x08
0x09
0x0a
0x0b
0x0c
0x0d
0x0e
0x0f
0x10
0x11
0x12
0x13
0x14
0x15
0x16
0x17
0x18
0x19
0x1a
0x1b
0x1c
0x1d
0x1e
0x1f

Meaning
Unknown HCI Command.
No Connection.
Hardware Failure.
Page Timeout.
Authentication Failure.
Key Missing.
Memory Full.
Connection Timeout.
Max Number Of Connections.
Max Number Of SCO Connections To A Device.
ACL Connection already exists.
Command Disallowed.
Host Rejected due to limited resources.
Host Rejected due to security reas ons.
Host Rejected due to remote device is only a personal
device.
Host Timeout.
Unsupported Feature or Parameter Value.
Invalid HCI Command Parameters.
Other End Terminated Connection: Uset Ended
Connection.
Other End Terminated Connection:Low Resources.
Other End Terminated Connection: About to Power
Off.
Connection Terminated by Local Host.
Repeated Attempts.
Paring Not Allowed.
Unknown LMP PDU.
Unsupported Remote Feature.
SCO Offset Rejected.
SCO Interval Rejected.
SCO Air Mode Rejected.
Invalid LMP Parameters.
Unspecified Error.

** See the Specification of the Bluetooth System for details.

3-60

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436 )

3.21 Bluetooth Test

3 Tests and Diagnostics

Table 3-3 Error code for Bluetooth test (BD_ADDR of the DUT) (2/2)
Error code
0x20
0x21
0x22
0x23
0x24
0x25
0x26
0x27
0x28
0x29
0x2a
0x2b
0x2c
0x2d
0x2e
0x2f

Meaning
Unsupported LMP Parameter Value.
Role Change Not Allowed.
LMP Response Timeout.
LMP Error Transaction Collosion.
LMP PDU Not Allowed.
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist

** See the Specification of the Bluetooth System in detail.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3-61

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.22 Error Code and Error Status Names

3.22 Error Code and Error Status Names
Table 3-4 lists the error codes and error status names for the Diagnostic Test.
Table 3-4 Error codes and error status names (1/3)
Device name

3-62

Error code

Error status name

(Common)

FF

Data Compare Error

System

01

ROM Checksum Error

Memory

01
02
14
DD
DE
DF

Parity Error
Protected Mode Not Changed
Memory Read/Write Error
Cache Memory Error
2 Cache Error
TAG-RAM Error

FDD

01
02
03
04
06
08
09
10
20
40
60
80
EE

Bad Command
Address Mark Not Found
Write Protected
Record Not Found
Media Removed
DMA Overrun Error
DMA Boundary Error
CRC Error
FDC Error
Seek Error
FDD Not Drive Error
Time Out Error
Write Buffer Error

Printer

01
08
10
20
40
80

Time Out
Fault
Select Line
Out Of Paper
Power Off
Busy Line

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

3.22 Error Code and Error Status Names

3 Tests and Diagnostics

Table 3-4 Error codes and error status names (2/3)
Device name

Error code

Error status name

ASYNC

01
02
04
08
10
20
40
50
60
70
80
88

DSR On Time Out
CTS On Time Out
RX-READY Time Out
TX-BUFFER Full Time Out
Parity Error
Framing Error
Overrun Error
Underrun Error
Timer Time Out Error
CRC Error
Line Status Error
Modem Status Error

HDD

01
02
04
05
07
08
09
0A
0B
10
11
20
40
80
AA
BB
CC
E0
EE
DA

Bad Command Error
Address Mark Not Found
Record Not Found
HDC Not Reset Error
Drive Not Initialized
HDC Overrun (DRQ)
DMA Boundary Error
Bad Sector
Bad Track Error
ECC Error
ECC Recover Enable
HDC Error
Seek Error
Time Out Error
Drive Not Ready
Undefined Error
Write Fault
Status Error
Access Time Out Error
No HDD

NDP

01
02
03
04
05
06

No Co-Processor
Control Word Error
Status Word Error
Bus Error
Addition Error
Multiply Error

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual(960-436)

3-63

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.22 Error Code and Error Status Names

Table 3-4 Error codes and error status names (3/3)
Device name

3-64

Error code

Error status name

Expansion

C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
CD
CE

Address Line Error
REG# Line Error
CE#1 Line Error
CE#2 Line Error
DATA Line Error
WAIT Line Error
BSY# Line Error
BVD1 Line Error
No PCMCIA
Card Type Error

CD/DVD-ROM

01
02
03
04
05
06
09
11
20
40
80
90
BO

Bad Command
Illegal Length
Unit Attention
Media Change Request
Media Detected
Additional Sense
Boundary Error
Corrected Data Error
Drive Not Ready
Seek Error
Time Out
Reset Error
Address Error

Keyboard

01
02
03
04
05
06

Mouse Interface Error
IPS Interface Error
Interface Error
Retransmit Error
Mouse Handler Not Support
PS/2 Mouse & IPS Not Support

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

3.23 Hard Disk Test Detail Status

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.23 Hard Disk Test Detail Status
When an error occurs in the hard disk test, the following message is displayed:
HDC status = XXXXXXXX
Detailed information about the hard disk test error is displayed on the screen by an eight-digit number.
The first four digits represent the hard disk controller (HDC) error status number and the last four digits
are not used.
The hard disk controller error status is composed of two bytes; the first byte displays the contents of the
HDC status register in hexadecimal form and the second byte displays the HDC error register.
The contents of the HDC status register and error register are listed in Tables 3-5 and 3-6.
Table 3-5 Hard disk controller status register contents
Bit

Name

Description

7

BSY
(Busy)

“0” … HDC is ready.
“1” … HDC is busy.

6

DRDY
(Drive ready)

“0” … Hard disk drive is not ready to accept any command.
“1” … Hard disk drive is ready.

5

DWF
(Drive write fault)

“0” … DWF error is not detected.
“1” … Write fault condition occurred.

4

DSC
(Drive seek
complete)

“0” … The hard disk drive heads are not settled over a track.
“1” … The hard disk drive heads are settled over a track.

3

DRQ
(Data request)

“0” … Drive is not ready for data transfer.
“1” … Drive is ready for data transfer.

2

CORR
(Corrected data)

“0” … Not used
“1” … Correctable data error is corrected.

1

IDX
(Index)

“0” … Not used
“1” … Index is sensed.

0

ERR
(Error)

“0” … Normal
“1” … The previous command was terminated with an error.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3-65

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.23 Hard Disk Test Detail Status

Table 3-6 Error register contents
Bit

Name

7

BBK1
(Bad block mark)

“0” … Not used
“1” … A bad block mark is detected.

6

UNC
(Uncorrectable)

“0” … There is no uncorrectable data error.
“1” … Uncorrectable data error has been detected.

5

——

Not used

4

IDNF
(Identification)

“0” … Not used
“1” … There was no ID field in the requested sector.

3

——

Not used

2

ABRT
(Abort)

“0” … Not used
“1” … Illegal command error or a drive status error occurred.

1

TK00

“0” … The hard disk found track 0 during a recalibrate command.

(Track 0)

“1” … The hard disk could not find track 0 during a recalibrate
command.

——

Not used.

0

3-66

Description

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

3.24 Head Cleaning

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.24 Head Cleaning

3.24.1

Function Description

This function cleans the heads in the USB FDD by executing a series of head load/seek and read
operations. A cleaning kit is necessary to perform this program.
3.24.2

Operations

1. Selecting test 4 from the DIAGNOSTIC MENU and pressing Enter displays the following
messages:
DIAGNOSTICS - FLOPPY DISK HEAD CLEANING : VX.XX
Mount cleaning disk(s) on drive(s).
Press any key when ready.
2. Remove the Diagnostics Disk from the FDD, then insert the cleaning disk and press Enter.
3. When the following message appears, the FDD head cleaning has begun.
cleaning start
4. The display automatically returns to the DIAGNOSTIC MENU when the program is
completed.

Satellite 1400/2400 Maintenance Manual (960 -364/365)

3-67

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.25 Log Utilities

3.25 Log Utilities

3.25.1

Function Description

This function logs error information generated while a test is in progress and stores the results in RAM.
This function can store data on a floppy disk or output the data to a printer. If the power switch is turned
off, the error information will be lost. The error information is displayed in the following order:
1. Error count (CNT)
2. Test name (TS-NAME)
3. Subtest number (TS-NAME)
4. Pass count (PASS)
5. Error status (STS)
6. FDD/HDD or memory address (ADDR)
7. Write data (WD)
8. Read data (RD)
9. HDC status (HSTS)
10. Error status name (ERROR STATUS NAME)
3.25.2

Operations

Selecting 5 and pressing Enter in the DIAGNOSTIC MENU, logs error information into RAM or
onto a floppy disk. The error information is displayed in the following format:
XXXXX ERRORS
CNT TS-NO PASS STS ADDR

WD RD HSTS

[ERROR STATUS NAME]

001 EXP01 0000 XXX 00000000 00 00 0000
001 EXP03 0000 XXX 00000000 00 00 0000

FDD-WRITE PROTECTED
FDD-TIME OUT ERROR

Address
Error status
Pass count
Subtest number
Test name

HDC status
Read data
Error status name
Write data

Error count
[[1:Next,2:Prev,3:Exit,4:Clear,5:Print,6:FD Log Read,7:FD Log Write]]

3-68

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3.25 Log Utilities

3 Tests and Diagnostics

2. The error information displayed on the screen can be manipulated by the following number
keys:
1 scrolls the display to the next page.
2 scrolls the display to the previous page.
3 returns to the Diagnostic Menu.
4 erases all error log information in RAM.
5 outputs the error log information to a printer.
6 reads the log information from a floppy disk.
7 writes the log information to a floppy disk.
3. In the case of “error retry OK”, a capital “R” will be placed at the beginning of the error status.
However, it is not added to the error count.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3-69

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.26 Running Test

3.26 Running Test

3.26.1

Function Description

This function automatically executes the following tests in sequence:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
3.26.2

System test (subtest 01)
Memory test (subtests 01, 02, 04, and 06)
Real timer test (subtest 02)
Display test (subtest 01)
FDD test (subtest 02)
HDD test (subtests 01 and 05)
Printer test (subtest 03) if selected
Async test (subtest 01) (not supported in this model)

Operations

NOTE: Do not forget to load a work disk in the FDD. If a work disk is not loaded, an error
will be generated during the FDD testing.
1. Remove the diagnostics disk from the floppy disk drive and insert the work disk.
2. Select 6 from the Diagnostic Menu and press Enter, the following message displays:
Printer wrap around test (Y/N) ?
Selecting Y (yes) executes the printer wraparound test. A printer wraparound connector must
be connected to the parallel port of the computer to properly execute this test.
3. Select Y or N and press Enter. The following message will appear:
Serial#A wrap around test (Y/N) ?
Selecting Y (yes) executes the ASYNC wraparound test. An RS-232-C wraparound
connector must be connected to the serial port of the computer to properly execute this test.

3-70

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

3.26 Running Test

3 Tests and Diagnostics

4. Select No and press Enter. The following message will appear:
Mount the work disk(s) on the drive(s),
then press [Enter] key.
[Warning : The contents of the disk(s),
will be destroyed.]
5. This program is executed continuously. To terminate the program, press Ctrl +Break.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3-71

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.27 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities

3.27 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities

3.27.1

Function Description

This function formats the FDD, copies the floppy disk and displays the dump list for both the FDD and
HDD.
1. FORMAT
NOTE: This program is only for testing a floppy disk drive. The option is different from the
Toshiba MS-DOS FORMAT command.
This program can format a 5.25-inch or 3.5-inch floppy disk in the following formats:
(a) 2DD: Double-sided, double-density, double-track, 96/135 TPI, MFM mode, 512
bytes, 9 sectors/track.
(b) 2HD: Double-sided, high-density, double-track, 96/135 TPI, MFM mode, 512 bytes,
18 sectors/track.
2. COPY
This program copies data from a source floppy disk to a target floppy disk.
3. DUMP
This program displays the contents of the floppy disk and the designated sectors of the hard
disk on the display.
4. HDD ID
This program reads the hard disk ID and displays the hard disk ID, serial number and other
hard disk information.

3-72

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

3.27 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities

3.27.2

3 Tests and Diagnostics

Operations

1. Selecting 7 from the DIAGNOSTIC MENU and pressing Enter displays the following
message:
[ FDD UTILITIES ]
1
2
3
4
9

-

FORMAT
COPY
DUMP
HDD ID READ
EXIT TO DIAGNOSTICS MENU

2. FORMAT program
(a) Selecting FORMAT displays the following message:
DIAGNOSTICS - FLOPPY DISK FORMAT : VX.XX
Drive number select (1:A, 2:B) ?

(b) Select a drive number to display the following message:
Type select (0:2DD, 3:2HD) ?

(c) Select a media/drive type number and press Enter. A message similar to the one
below will be displayed:
Warning : Disk data will be destroyed.
Insert work disk into drive A:
Press any key when ready.

(d) Remove the Diagnostics Disk from the FDD, insert the work disk and press any key.
The following message will be displayed when the FDD format is executed:
[ FDD TYPE ] : TRACK = XXX
[ FDD TYPE ] : HEAD
= X
[ FDD TYPE ] : SECTOR = XX
Format start
[[track, head = XXX X]]

After the floppy disk is formatted, the following message will appear:
Format complete
Another format (1:Yes/2:No) ?

(e) Typing 1 displays the message from step (c) above. Typing 2 returns the test to the
DIAGNOSTIC MENU.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3-73

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.27 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities

3. COPY program
(a) When COPY is selected, the following message appears:
FLOPPY DISK FORMAT & COPY : VX.XX
Type select (0:2DD,3:2HD) ?

(b) Selecting a media/drive type number will display a message similar to the one below:
Insert source disk into drive A:
Press any key when ready.

(c) Remove the Diagnostics Disk from the FDD, insert the source disk and press any key.
The following message will appear, indicating the program has started.
[ FD TYPE ] : TRACK = XXX
[ FD TYPE ] : HEAD
= X
[ FD TYPE ] : SECTOR = XX
Copy start
[[ track,head = XXX X ]]

(d) Remove the source disk from the FDD, insert a formatted work disk and press any
key. The [[ track, head = XXX X ]] message will appear and start copying to the target
disk. When the amount of data is too large to be copied in one operation, the message
from step (b) displays again. After the floppy disk has been copied, the following
message will appear:
Copy complete
Another copy (1:Yes/2:No) ?

(e) To copy another disk, type 1 and the message from step (a) displays again. Entering 2
returns the test program to the DIAGNOSTIC MENU.

3-74

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

3.27 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities

3 Tests and Diagnostics

4. DUMP program
(a) When DUMP is selected, the following message appears:
DIAGNOSTICS-HARD DISK & FLOPPY DISK DUMP : VX.XX
Drive type select (1:FDD, 2:HDD) ?

(b) When FDD is selected, the following message appears. Select a format type number.
When HDD is selected, the display will go to step (g).
Select drive number

(1:A, 2:B) ?

(c) Select a drive number and the following message will be displayed.
Format type select (1:2DD, 2:2HD) ?

(d) Select a media type number and the following message will appear:
Insert source disk into drive A:
Press any key when ready.

(e) Insert a source disk and press any key and the following message will appear:
--- Max.
[ Track
[ Head
[ Sector

address --] = XXXX
] = XX
] = XX

Track number ??

(f) Set the track number, head number and sector number you want to dump. The system
will access the disk and dump a list and the following message appears. Select 3 to end
the list display.
Press number key (1:up, 2:down, 3:end) ?

(g) When HDD is selected in step (a), the following message appears.
Select drive number (1:C, 2:d) ?

(h) Select a drive number. Then the following message appears.
--- Max. address --[ LBA ] = XXXX
LBA number ????????

(i) Enter a LBA number, Then the system accesses the disk and dumps a list.
(j) The following message appears. Select 3 to end the list display.
Press number key (1:up, 2:down, 3:end) ?

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3-75

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.27 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities

(k) The following message appears. Select 2 to return to the FDD UTILITIES menu.
Another dump (1:Yes, 2:No) ?
5. HDD-ID READ
Selecting HDD ID READ displays the following HDD ID configuration:
[HDD ID Read (VX.XX)]
ID code (h)
No. of Cylinders
Removable Cylinders
No. of Heads
Unformat Bytes/Track
Unformat Bytes/Sector
Sectors/Track
Gap Length
Sync. Bytes
Reserved (h)
Serial No.
Controller Type (h)
Sector Buffers
ECC Bytes
Firmware Rev.
Model No.
Reserved (h)
Double Word Capability

[Drive #X]
= XXXX
= XXXX XXXX
= XXXX XXXX
= XXXX XXXX
= XXXX XXXX
= XXXX XXXX
= XXXX XXXX
= XXXX XXXX
= XXXX XXXX
= XXXX
= YYY...
= XXXX
= XXXX XXXX
= XXXX XXXX
= YYYYYY..
= YYYY...
= XXXX
= XXXX XXXX

Press [Enter] key

Press Enter to return to the FDD UTILITIES MENU.

3-76

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960 -436)

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.28 System Configuration

3

3.28 System Configuration

3.28.1 Function Description
The System Configuration program contains the following configuration information for the
computer:
1. Processor Type
2. VGA Controller
3. MS-DOS Version
4. BIOS ROM version (1st ID, 2nd ID)
5. Boot ROM version
6. KBC version
7. PS Microprocessor Version
8. Total Memory Size
9. Battery code
10. Sound System
11. The number of printer ports
12. The number of ASYNC ports
13. The number of math co-processors
14. The number of PCMCIA Slots
15. Modem Type
16. LAN Type
17. The number of floppy disk drives
18. The number of hard disk drives
19. Date/Time

3-76

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3.28 System Configuration

3.28.2

3 Tests and Diagnostics

Operations

Selecting 8 from the DIAGNOSTIC MENU and pressing Enter displays the following system
configuration:
System Configuration Display : Ver X.XX [Machine Name XXXXXX]
* *** * * * * * * *** * * * * * * * * -

Processor Type
VGA Controller
MS-DOS Version
BIOS ROM Version
BOOT ROM Version
KBC Version
PS Micom Version
Total Memory Size
Battery Code
Sound System
X Printer Adapter
X ASYNC Adapter

=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

= XXXX
XXXX
VX.XX
VX.XX 1st ID = XXH, 2nd ID = XXH
VX.XX
VX.XX
VX.XX
( EC Version = VX.XX )
XXXXXMB ( Conventional Memory = XXXXXKB )
XXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXX
LPT1=XXXX LPT2=XXXX LPT3=XXXX
COM1=XXXX COM2=XXXX COM3=XXXX

X Math Co-Processor
X PCMCIA Slot
Modem
= XXX
LAN
= XXX
X Floppy Disk Drive(s) Track =XX, Head =XX, Sector =XX
X Hard Disk Drive(s)
#1 Sectors =XXXXX (XX GB)
#2 Sectors
=XXXXX (XX GB)

* Press [Enter] Key

[ Date = XXXX-YY-ZZ, XX:YY:ZZ ]

Press Enter to return to the DIAGNOSTIC MENU.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3-77

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.29

SETUP

3.29.1

Function Description

3.29 SETUP

This program displays the current system setup information as listed below:
1. Memory
(a) Total
2. System Date/Time
(a) Date (MM-DD-YYYY)
(b) Time (HH:MM:SS)
3. Battery
(a) Battery Save Mode
4. Password
5. Boot Priority
(a) Boot Priority
(b) HDD Priority
6. Display
(a) Power On Display
(b) TV Type
7. Others
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)

Power-up Mode
CPU Cache
Level 2 Cache
Dynamic CPU Frequency Mode
Auto Power On
Panel Power On/Off

8. Configuration
(a) Device Config.
9. I/O Ports
(a) Serial
(b) Parallel

3-78

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3.29 SETUP

3 Tests and Diagnostics

10. Drives I/O
(a) Built-in HDD
(b) Select Bay
11. PCI Bus
(a) PCI Bus
12. PC Card
(a) Controller Mode
13. Peripheral
(a) Internal Pointing Device
(b) Ext keyboard “Fn”
(c) Paralla Port Mode
(d) Hard Disk Mode
14. Legacy Emulation
(a) USB kayboard/Mouse Legacy Emulation
(b) USB-FDD Legacy Emulation
15. PCI LAN
(a) Built-in LAN
16. HDD Password
(a) HDD
(b) HDD Password Mode
(c) User Password

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3-79

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.29.2

3.29 SETUP

Accessing the SETUP Program

Selecting 0 from the DIAGNOSTICS MENU and pressing Enter displays the TSETUP screen.
The TSETUP screen is divided into two pages: SYSTEM SETUP (1/2) and SYSTEM SETUP
(2/2).
SYSTEM SETUP (1/2)

ACPI BIOS version = X.XX

BOOT PRIORITY

MEMORY
Total

= XXXXXXKB

SYSTEM DATE/TIME
Date (MM-DD-YYYY)
Time (HH:MM:SS)

=XX-XX-XXXX
=XX:XX:XX

BATTERY
Battery Save Mode

= Full Power

Boot Priority =HDD →FDD→CD-ROM →LAN
HDD Rriority
=Built-in HDD→Second HDD →PC Card

DISPLAY
Power On Display

= Auto-Selected

TV Type

= NTSC

OTHERS
PASSWORD

Power-up mode
CPU Cache
Level 2 Cache
Dynamic CPU Frequency

Not Registerd

HDD PASSWORD
HDD
HDD Password Mode
User Password

= Built-in HDD
= User only
= Not Registered

SYSTEM SETUP (2/2)

CONFIGURATION
Device Config.

= Setup by OS

ACPI BIOS version = X.XX

PC CARD
Controller Mode = Auto-Selected

PERIPHERAL

I/O PORTS
Serial

= COM1(3F8H/IRQ4)

Parallel

= LPT1(378/IRQ7/ch3)

DRIVES I/O

Internal Pointing Device
Ext kayboard “Fn”
Parallel Port Mode
Hard
Disk
Mode

=Enabled
=Disabled
=ECP
=Enhanced

LEGACY EMULATION

Built-in HDD
= Primary IDE(1F0H/IRG14)
Select Bay
=Secondary IDE(170H/IRQ15)

PCI BUS
PCI BUS

Auto Power On
Panel Power On/Off

= Boot
= Enabled
= Enabled
Mode
= Dynamically Switchable
= Disabled
= Disabled

USB KB/Mouse Legacy Emulation

= Enabled
USB-FDD Legacy Emulation
= Enabled

PCI LAN
= IRQ11

Built-in LAN

= Enabled

↑↓→←: Select items Space, BkSp: Change values PgDn, PgUp: Change pages
Esc: Exit without saving Home: Set default values End: Save changes and Exit

3-80

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3.29 SETUP

3 Tests and Diagnostics

NOTE: 1) Panel Power On/Off under OTHERS appears only when the Power-up Mode
is in Resume mode.
2) USB FDD Legacy Emulation under LEGACY EMULATION appears only
when Floppy Disk I/O is set to Disabled.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3-81

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.29 SETUP

Moving Within the SETUP Menu and Changing Values
1. Press ß and à to move between the two columns. Press PgDn and PgUp to move
between the two pages. Press ↑ and ↓ to move between items in a column.
2. Press either the space bar to change the value.
Accepting Changes and Exiting the SETUP Window
1. Press End to accept the changes you made.
The following message is displayed:
Are you sure? (Y/N)
The changes you made will cause the system to reboot.

2. To make other changes, press N. Repeat the steps above.
3. To accept the changes, press Y.
NOTE: You can press Esc to quit at any time without saving changes. SETUP asks you
to confirm that you do not want to save your changes toward User.
The Factory Preset Configuration
When you access SETUP, the current configuration is displayed.
1. To show the factory preset configuration, press Home.
2. Press End and then press Y to accept the factory preset settings.
NOTE: When you execute the default setting, the following settings are not changed:
HDD Mode
Password
Write Policy in the CPU Cache

3-82

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3.29 SETUP

3 Tests and Diagnostics

SETUP Options
The SETUP screen is divided into functionally related groups. This section describes each group
and its options.
1. Memory
This group of options displays the computer’s memory.
(a) Total
This field displays the total amount of memory installed and is automatically
calculated by the computer. You cannot change this value.
2. System Date/Time
Use this option to set the computer’s system date/time. Press ↓ to move the cursor to the
right and press ↑ to move the cursor to the left. Press the space bar to increase the
number and press BkSp to decrease the number.
(a) Date
Use this option to set the system date of the computer.
(b) Time
Use this option to set the system time of the computer.
3. Battery
This option is used to select Full Power, Low Power or User Setting of the battery
save mode.
(a) Battery Save Mode
When User Setting is selected, the sub-window, BATTERY SAVE OPTION is
displayed. The following set of options can be selected in the submenu.
Processing Speed
This feature changes the CPU processing speed.
High

CPU operates at high speed. (Default)

Low

CPU operates at low speed.

CPU Sleep Mode

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3-83

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.29 SETUP

Use this option to enable or disable the CPU sleep function.
Enabled

Enables sleep mode. (Default)

Disabled

Disables sleep mode.

Display Auto Off
Use this option to disable or set the duration of the display automatic power off
function. This function causes the computer to turn the LCD panel’s illumination off
if you make no entry for the set period of time.
Disabled

Disables display automatic power off.

xx Min.

Automatically turns off power to the LCD panel’s
illumination if the panel is not used for the duration set.
The duration xx can be set to 1, 3, 5, 10, 15, 20 or 30
minutes.

HDD Auto Off
Use this option to set the duration of the HDD automatic power off function.
xx Min.

Automatically turns off power to the hard disk drive
if it is not used for the duration set. The duration xx
can be set to 1, 3, 5, 10, 15, 20 or 30 minutes.

LCD Brightness
Use this option to set the level of LCD brightness.
Super-Bright

Full brightness for maximum visibility.

Bright

Full brightness for high visibility.

Semi-Bright

Less than full brightness for saving power.

Cooling Method
If the CPU becomes too hot, the fan turns on or the processing speed is lowered
automatically. When the CPU temperature falls to a normal range, the fan turns off.
Maximum performance

3-84

Turns on fan first, then if necessary lowers CPU
processing speed.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3.29 SETUP

3 Tests and Diagnostics

Battery optimized

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

Lowers the CPU processing speed first, then if
necessary turns on the fan.

3-85

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.29 SETUP

4. Password
This option allows you to set or reset the user password for power on.
Not Registered

Change or remove the password. (Default)

For details on setting the user password, refer to the User’s Manual.
5. Boot Priority
This tab sets the priority for booting the computer and the priority for the built-in HDD or
optional secondary HDD.
(a) Boot Priority
HDD→FDD→ CD-ROM →LAN:
FDD→HDD→ CD-ROM →LAN:

HDD→CD-ROM→ LAN→FDD:

The computer looks for bootable files
in the following order: HDD,FDD, CDROM and LAN. (Default)
The computer looks for bootable files
in the following order: FDD,HDD, CDROM and LAN.
The computer looks for bootable files
in the following order: HDD, CD-ROM,
LAN and FDD.

FDD→CD-ROM→ LAN→HDD:

The computer looks for bootable files
in the following order: FDD, CD-ROM,
LAN and HDD.

CD-ROM →LAN→ HDD→FDD:

The computer looks for bootable files
in the following order: CD-ROM, LAN,
HDD and FDD.

CD-ROM →LAN→ FDD→HDD:

The computer looks for bootable files
in the following order: CD-ROM, LAN,
FDD and HDD.

NOTE: CD-ROM refers to a CD-ROM, DVD-ROM, CD-RW/DVD or DVD Multi
drive.

(b) HDD Priority
This option enables to select the prio rity for the Built-in HDD, optional second
HDD or PC card.

3-86

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3.29 SETUP

3 Tests and Diagnostics
Built-in HDD → Second HDD → PC Card (Default)
Second HDD → Built-in HDD → PC Card
Built-in HDD → PC Card → Second HDD
Second HDD → PC Card → Built-in HDD
PC Card → Built-in HDD → Second HDD
PC Card → Second HDD → Built-in HDD

6. Display
This group of options configures the computer’s display.
(a) Power On Display
This option is used to select the display when booting up.
Auto-Selected

Selects an external monitor if one is connected. Otherwise it
selects the internal LCD. (Default)

LCD+AnalogRGB

Selects both the internal LCD and the external monitor for
simultaneous display.

NOTE: 1) When starting the computer in Resume mode, the last configuration is
remembered. If data does not appear on the display you are using after
starting in Resume mode, pressing Fn+F5.
2) Pressing Fn+F5 changes the display setting in the order of internal
LCD to simultaneous to external monitor.
(b) TV Type
This option lets you make settings for television display.
NTSC

(Default)

PAL
7. Others
Whether or not you need to configure the computer with these options depends primarily on
the kind of software or peripherals you use.
(a) Power-up Mode
Use this option to choose between resume and boot mode. This option can also be
set by hotkeys.
Boot

Turns on boot mode. (Default)

Resume

Turns on resume mode.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3-87

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.29 SETUP

(b) CPU Cache
Use this option to enable or disable the CPU cache.
Enabled

Enables the CPU cache. (Default)

Disabled

Disables the CPU cache.

When enabled is selected, a subwindow similar to the one below is displayed to
select the cache write policy. The options for this setting are Write-back (default)
and Write-through for CPU cache.
OPTION
Write policy

=

Write-back

Write-back policy provides better system performance, because main memory is
accessed only when necessary to update the cache contents with changes in main
memory. Write-through policy accesses main memory every time data is handled by
the processor.
(c) Level 2 Cache
Use this option to enable or disable the level 2 cache.
Enabled

Enables the level 2 cache. (Default)

Disabled

Disables the level 2 cache.

(d) Dynamic CPU Frequency mode
Use this option to choose a setting from the followings.
Dynamically Switchable
Enables Intel SpeedStep technology. When the computer is in
use, the CPU power consumption and clock speed are
automatically switched when necessary. (Default)
Always High

Disables Intel SpeedStep technology and always runs the
processor at its fastest speed.

Always Low

Disables Intel SpeedStep technology and always runs the
processor at low power consumption and low speed.

(e) Auto Power On

3-88

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3.29 SETUP

3 Tests and Diagnostics

Use this option to set a time and date for automatic power on and enable or disable
the ring indicator feature. Ring Indicator appears only when the computer is in
Resume mode. Alarm Date Option appears only when Alarm Time is enabled.
OPTIONS
Alarm Time
Alarm Date Option
Ring Indicator
Wake-up on LAN

=
=
=
=

00:00:00
Disabled
Disabled*
Disabled**

* only for Modem Model **only for LAN Model
Alarm Time is set in the sequence of hours and minutes. Seconds cannot be
changed. Alarm Date Option is set in the sequence of month and day. If Alarm
Date is set to Disabled, the computer will be powered on at the same time every
day. Press ↓ to move the cursor to the right and ↑ to move the cursor to the left
when you set the date and time.
NOTE: 1) Do not remove the AC adaptor and battery pack at the same time
when you use this feature. If you do so, data saved by the resume
function will be lost. You must also reset this option.
2) If you have set a password and the computer boots by the Auto Power
On function and Resume is on, the computer will start with the instant
security function enabled. The password = message is not displayed;
however, you must enter the password to use the computer.
(f) Panel Power On/Off
This option sets the Panel Power On/Off function. It is effective only when Powerup Mode is set to Resume.
Enabled

Enables the Panel Power On/Off.

Disabled

Disables the Panel Power On/Off (Default)

8. Configuration
This option displays the configuration method.
The devices are initialized when the PNP OS loads.
Setup by OS

First, devices necessary for loading the OS will be
initialized. After the PNP OS loads, other devices will be
initialized by the OS. In this case, setup of PC Cards will
be fixed to “Auto-Selected,” and cannot be changed.
(Default)

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3-89

3 Tests and Diagnostics

All Devices

3.29 SETUP

All devices will be initialized.

If you are using an OS that does not have PNP capacity, select “All Devices.”
The Display shows the following message:
Device Config. = All Devices

3-90

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3.29 SETUP

3 Tests and Diagnostics

9. I/O ports
This option controls settings for the parallel port.
NOTE: Do not assign the same interrupt request level and I/O address to the
serial port and PC card.
(a) Serial
Use this option to set the COM level for the serial port. The serial port interrupt
request level (IRQ) and I/O port base address for each COM level is shown below:
COM level

Interrupt level

I/O address

COM1

4

3F8H

COM2

3

2F8H

COM3

4

3E8H

COM3

5

3E8H

COM3

7

3E8H

COM4

3

2E8H

COM4

5

2E8H

COM4

7

2E8H

Not Used

(Serial port default)

Disables port

(b) Parallel
This option sets the interrupt request level (IRQ) and I/O port base address for the
parallel port. When the Printer Port Mode is set to Std. Bi-direct, the options are:
LPT setting

Interrupt level

I/O address

LPT 1

7

378H

LPT 2

5

278H

LPT 3

7

3BCH

Not Used

Disables port

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3-91

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.29 SETUP

When the Printer Port Mode (see settings below) is set to ECP, the DMA channel
can also be set to 1, 2 or 3. The default is 3.
LPT setting

Interrupt level

I/O address

LPT 1

7

378H

3 (Parallel port default)

LPT 2

5

278H

3

LPT 3

7

3BCH

3

Not Used

DMA channel

Disables the port

When you select one of the above options, except for Not Used, a subwindow
similar to the one below appears to let you set the DMA. The options for this setting
are Channel 1and Channel 3 (Default).
OPTIONS
DMA

= Channel 3 (Default)

For most printers, the port should be set to ECP. With some other parallel devices,
the setting should be Std. Bi-Direct.
10. Drives I/O
This option displays the address and interrupt level for hard disk drive, CD/DVD-ROM
drive and PC card. It is for information only and cannot be changed.
(a) Built-in HDD
Primary IDE (1F0H/IRQ14) The Built-in HDD is ready for use.
No Drive

The Built-in HDD is not installed.

(b) Select Bay
This option is displayed only when the hard disk drive or optical disk drive is
installed to the select bay. Secondary IDE (170H/IRQ15) Computer Selectable
Bay HDD.
(c) PC Card
When an ATA card is installed in IN13h, the sub window below is displayed.

Built-in HDD

ATA Card

3-92

DRIVES I/O
= Primary IDE (1F0H/IRQ14)

= Others (190H/IRQ)
TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3.29 SETUP

3 Tests and Diagnostics

11. PCI Bus
This item displays the interrupt level for the Card Bus. It is for information only and cannot
be changed.
PCI BUS = IRQ11
12. PC Card
This option sets the PC Card Controller mode. This option can be changed when “Device
Config.” is set to “All Devices”.
Auto-Selected

Use this setting for all PC Cards when OS supports Plug&Play.
(Default)

PCIC Compatible Use this setting for PCIC compatible PC card.
CardBus/16-bit

Use this setting when CardBus does not work properly in
Auto-Selected”, or PC card supports 16-bit.

13. Peripheral
Use this option to select the parallel port mode and hard disk mode.
(a) Internal Pointing Device
This option enables and disables the Touch Pad.
Enabled

Enables the Touch Pad. (Default)

Disabled

Disables the Touch Pad.

(b) Ext Keyboard "Fn"
Use this option to set the Fn key equivalent when you are using an external
keyboard. Selecting this option displays the following subwindow.
Enabled

Enables the feature.
KEYBOARD

Ext Keyboard "Fn" key equivalent
= Left Ctrl + Left Alt

Use this option to set a key combination on an external keyboard to emulate the Fn
key on the computer's internal keyboard. Setting an Fn key equivalent will enable

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3-93

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.29 SETUP

you to use “Hotkeys” by pressing the set combination in place of the Fn key. The
following items can be selected for this option:
Left Ctrl + Left Alt*
Right Ctrl + Right Alt*
Left Alt + Left Shift
Right Alt + Right Shift
Left Alt + Caps Lock
*If these selections are made, you cannot warm boot the system by pressing Ctrl +
Alt + Del.
Disabled

Disables the feature. (Default)

(c) Parallel Port Mode
The options in this tab are ECP and Standard Bi-directional.
ECP

Sets the port mode to Extended Capabilities Port (ECP). For most
printers, the port should be set to ECP. (Default)

Std. Bi-Direct.
This setting should be used with some other parallel devices.
(d) Hard Disk Mode
Use this item to select the hard disk mode.
Enhanced IDE
(Normal)

Select this mode when using an operating system that
supports Enhanced IDE. (Default)

Standard IDE Select this mode when using an operating system that does not
support Enhanced IDE.
NOTE: Formats for Enhanced IDE and Standard IDE are different, so if
you change the setting, you will have to reformat the hard disk for the
appropriate setting.
14. Legacy Emulation.
(a) USB keyboard/Mouse Legacy Emulation.
Use this option to enable or disable USB KB/Mouse Legacy Emulation. If your
operating system does not support USB, you can still use a USB mouse and
keyboard by setting the USB KB/Mouse Legacy Emulation item to Enabled.
Enabled

3-94

USB Legacy Support can be used. (Default)

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3.29 SETUP

3 Tests and Diagnostics

Disabled

USB Legacy Support cannot be used.

(b) USB-FDD Legacy Emulation.
Use this option to enable or disable USB-FDD Legacy Emulation.
Enabled

USB Legacy Support can be used. (Default)

Disabled

USB Legacy Support cannot be used.

15. PCI LAN (Not used)
This option enables/disables the Built-in LAN functions.
(a) Built-in LAN
Enabled

Enables Built-in LAN functions. (Default)

Disabled

Disables Built-in LAN functions.

16. HDD Password
This option sets HDD password. HDD password is a security function to protect the builtin HDD.
(a) HDD
This item selects the hard disk to set HDD password.
Built-in HDD

Sets HDD password for the built-in HDD (Default)

Second HDD

Sets HDD password for the second HDD

(b) HDD Password Mode
This item registers HDD password and can be selected only for registering HDD
password. To change HDD Password Mode when HDD password is registered,
delete the registered HDD password first, and then register new password.
User Only

Sets only User HDD Password (Default)

Master+User

Sets Master HDD Password and User HDD Password

(c) User Password
This item sets User password.
For details on setting user password, refer to the User’s Manual.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

3-95

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3-96

3.29 SETUP

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

Chapter 4
Replacement Procedures

4 Replacement Procedures

4-ii

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4 Replacement Procedures

Chapter 4

Contents

4.1

General........................................................................................................................ 4-1

4.2

Battery Pack ................................................................................................................ 4-9

4.3

Optional PC Card...................................................................................................... 4-12

4.4

Optional SD Card...................................................................................................... 4-14

4.5

HDD......................................................................................................................... 4-15

4.6

Slim Select Bay Module ............................................................................................. 4-20

4.7

Modem Daughter Card .............................................................................................. 4-24

4.8

CPU.......................................................................................................................... 4-27

4.9

Keyboard .................................................................................................................. 4-32

4.10

Memory Module........................................................................................................ 4-36

4.11

Sensor/Switch Board ................................................................................................. 4-38

4.12

Touch Pad................................................................................................................. 4-40

4.13

Wireless LAN Card................................................................................................... 4-44

4.14

Bluetooth Module ...................................................................................................... 4-47

4.15

Display Assembly....................................................................................................... 4-49

4.16

LED Board................................................................................................................ 4-53

4.17

Sound Board ............................................................................................................. 4-55

4.18

System Board/RTC Battery/DC-IN Jack ................................................................... 4-57

4.19

USB Board................................................................................................................ 4-62

4.20

Fan............................................................................................................................ 4-64

4.21

Display Mask............................................................................................................. 4-66

4.22

FL Inverter ................................................................................................................ 4-68

4.23

LCD Module ............................................................................................................. 4-70

4.24

Wireless LAN Antenna/Bluetooth Antenna/Display Cover/Speaker............................. 4-74

4.25

Fluorescent Lamp ...................................................................................................... 4-85

4.25.1 Replacing the 14.1 Inch XGA TOSHIBA Fluorescent Lamp....................................... 4-86
4.25.2 Replacing the 14.1 Inch SXGA+ Sharp Fluorescent Lamp .......................................... 4-98

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-iii

4 Replacement Procedures

Figures

Figure 4-1

Releasing the Battery pack ............................................................................. 4-10

Figure 4-2

Removing a PC card ...................................................................................... 4-12

Figure 4-3

Removing an SD card .................................................................................... 4-14

Figure 4-4

Removing the HDD cover .............................................................................. 4-16

Figure 4-5

Removing the HDD pack............................................................................... 4-17

Figure 4-6

Removing the HDD bracket ........................................................................... 4-18

Figure 4-7

Removing the Slim select bay module.............................................................. 4-21

Figure 4-8

Disassembling the Slim select bay module ....................................................... 4-22

Figure 4-9

Removing the Modem daughter card cover..................................................... 4-24

Figure 4-10

Removing the Modem daughter card .............................................................. 4-25

Figure 4-11

Removing the CPU cover............................................................................... 4-27

Figure 4-12

Removing the Fin ........................................................................................... 4-28

Figure 4-13

Unlocking the CPU........................................................................................ 4-29

Figure 4-14

Applying new grease ...................................................................................... 4-30

Figure 4-15

Removing the Keyboard brace ....................................................................... 4-32

Figure 4-16

Removing the Keyboard................................................................................. 4-33

Figure 4-17

Removing the Keyboard support plate............................................................ 4-34

Figure 4-18

Removing the Memory module ....................................................................... 4-36

Figure 4-19

Removing the Sensor/Switch board ................................................................ 4-38

Figure 4-20

Removing the Palm rest (1)............................................................................. 4-40

Figure 4-21

Removing the Palm rest (2)............................................................................. 4-41

Figure 4-22

Removing the Touch pad and Touch pad switch.............................................. 4-42

Figure 4-23

Removing the Wireless LAN card cover......................................................... 4-44

Figure 4-24

Removing the Wireless LAN card .................................................................. 4-45

Figure 4-25

Removing the Bluetooth module...................................................................... 4-48

Figure 4-26

Removing the Display assembly (1)................................................................. 4-49

4-iv

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4 Replacement Procedures

Figure 4-27

Removing the Display assembly (2)................................................................. 4-50

Figure 4-28

Removing the Display assembly (3)................................................................. 4-51

Figure 4-29

Removing the LED board............................................................................... 4-53

Figure 4-30

Removing the Sound board ............................................................................ 4-55

Figure 4-31

Removing the System board/RTC battery/DC-IN jack (1).............................. 4-58

Figure 4-32

Removing the System board/RTC battery/DC-IN jack (2).............................. 4-59

Figure 4-33

Removing the DC-IN jack ............................................................................. 4-60

Figure 4-34

Removing the USB board............................................................................... 4-62

Figure 4-35

Removing the Fan .......................................................................................... 4-64

Figure 4-36

Removing the Display mask (1) ...................................................................... 4-66

Figure 4-37

Removing the Display mask (2) ...................................................................... 4-67

Figure 4-38

Removing the FL inverter ............................................................................... 4-68

Figure 4-39

Removing the LCD module (1)....................................................................... 4-71

Figure 4-40

Removing the LCD module (2)....................................................................... 4-72

Figure 4-41

Removing the Insulator................................................................................... 4-74

Figure 4-42

Removing the Cable holder............................................................................. 4-75

Figure 4-43

Removing the cables....................................................................................... 4-76

Figure 4-44

Removing the Hinge (1).................................................................................. 4-77

Figure 4-45

Removing the Wireless LAN/Bluetooth antenna .............................................. 4-78

Figure 4-46

Removing the LCD cable ............................................................................... 4-79

Figure 4-47

Removing the Speaker cable .......................................................................... 4-80

Figure 4-48

Removing the Speaker and Side cover............................................................ 4-81

Figure 4-49

Removing the Hinge (2).................................................................................. 4-82

Figure 4-50

Installing the Wireless LAN/Bluetooth antenna................................................ 4-83

Figure 4-51

Replacing TOSHIBA fluorescent lamp (XGA) (1) .......................................... 4-87

Figure 4-52

Replacing TOSHIBA fluorescent lamp (XGA) (2) .......................................... 4-88

Figure 4-53

Replacing TOSHIBA fluorescent lamp (XGA) (3) .......................................... 4-89

Figure 4-54

Replacing TOSHIBA fluorescent lamp (XGA) (4) .......................................... 4-90

Figure 4-55

Replacing TOSHIBA fluorescent lamp (XGA) (5) .......................................... 4-91

Figure 4-56

Replacing TOSHIBA fluorescent lamp (XGA) (6) .......................................... 4-92

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-v

4 Replacement Procedures

Figure 4-57

Replacing TOSHIBA fluorescent lamp (XGA) (7) .......................................... 4-93

Figure 4-58

Replacing TOSHIBA fluorescent lamp (XGA) (8) .......................................... 4-94

Figure 4-59

Replacing TOSHIBA fluorescent lamp (XGA) (9) .......................................... 4-95

Figure 4-60

Replacing TOSHIBA fluorescent lamp (XGA) (10)........................................ 4-96

Figure 4-61

Replacing TOSHIBA fluorescent lamp (XGA) (11)........................................ 4-97

Figure 4-62

Replacing Sharp fluorescent lamp (SXGA+) (1).............................................. 4-98

Figure 4-63

Replacing Sharp fluorescent lamp (SXGA+) (2).............................................. 4-99

Figure 4-64

Replacing Sharp fluorescent lamp (SXGA+) (3)............................................4-100

Figure 4-65

Replacing Sharp fluorescent lamp (SXGA+) (4)............................................4-101

Figure 4-66

Replacing Sharp fluorescent lamp (SXGA+) (5)............................................4-102

Figure 4-67

Replacing Sharp fluorescent lamp (SXGA+) (6)............................................4-103

Figure 4-68

Replacing Sharp fluorescent lamp (SXGA+) (7)............................................4-104

Figure 4-69

Replacing Sharp fluorescent lamp (SXGA+) (8)............................................4-105

Figure 4-70

Replacing Sharp fluorescent lamp (SXGA+) (9)............................................4-106

Figure 4-71

Replacing Sharp fluorescent lamp (SXGA+) (10)..........................................4-107

4-vi

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.1 General

4

4 Replacement Procedures

Replacement Procedures

4.1

General

This section explains how to disassemble the computer and replace Field Replaceable Units
(FRUs). It may not be necessary to remove all the FRUs in order to replace one. The chart below
is a guide to which FRUs need to be removed in order to remove others. Always start by removing
the battery pack, next, optional items such as the optional PC card and optional SD card, then
follow the line on the chart to determine which FRU you must remove next in order to repair the one
you think is causing the computer to operate improperly. Refer to the example at the bottom of the
page.
4.2 Battery
4.3
PC
Card

4.4
SD
Card

4.6
Slim
Select
Bay
module

4.7
Modem
Daughter
Card

4.5
HDD

4.9 Keyboard

4.8
CPU

4.12 Touch Pad

4.10 Memory Module

4.13 Wireless LAN card

4.11 Sensor/Switch Board

4.14 Bluetooth module

4.15 Display Assembly
4.16 LED Board

4.17 Sound Board

4.18 System Board/RTC Battery/DC-IN Jack

4.21 Display Mask
4.22 FL Inverter
4.23 LCD Module

4.19 USB Board

How to See the Chart
Two examples of
referring to the chart are
shown below.

4.20 Fan

4.24 Wireless LAN Antenna/Bluetooth
Antenna/Display Cover/Speaker

4.2 Battery
4.3
PC
Card

4.4
SD
Card

4.6
Slim
Select
Bay
module

4.7
Modem
Daughter
Card

4.5
HDD

4.9 Keyboard

•Removing the System
4.10 Memory
4.11 Sensor/Switch
Module
Board
Board
First, 4.2 Battery to 4.14
4.8
4.12 Touch Pad
Bluetooth must be
CPU
removed. Then remove
4.13 Wireless LAN card
4.14 Bluetooth module
4.15 Display Assembly,
4.16 LED Board and 4.17 4.15 Display Assembly
Sound Board to remove
4.16 LED Board
4.17 Sound Board
the System Board.
4.21 Display Mask
4.18 System Board/RTC Battery/DC-IN Jack

4.22 FL Inverter
4.23 LCD Module

4.19 USB Board

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.20 Fan

4.24 Wireless LAN Antenna/Bluetooth
Antenna/Display Cover/Speaker

4-1

4 Replacement Procedures

4.1 General

Safety Precautions
Before you begin disassembly, read the following safety precautions and observe them carefully as
you work.
DANGER: 1) Always use the genuine battery that is authorized by Toshiba or
compatible with the unit. Since other battery packs have different
specifications, they may be incompatible with the unit, and may burst or
explode.
Never heat or disassemble the battery pack, as that could cause leakage
of alkaline solution. Never throw the battery pack into a fire, as that
could cause the battery pack to explode.
2) The power supply, FL inverter and other components carry high
voltages. If you need to turn on the power of a partially disassembled
computer to check its operation, be very careful not to touch connectors
or components, in order to avoid the risk of electric shock.
Also, do not disassemble individual components in first-level
maintenance.
WARNING: 1) Turn off the power and disconnect the AC adaptor from the power
source, to avoid exposure to electric shock.
2) Batteries in the computer retain an electrical charge, so there is danger
of electrical shock even when the computer is disconnected from an AC
power source. Remove any metal jewelry or accessories such as
necklaces, bracelets or rings, in order to reduce the risk of electric shock.
Never work with wet or damp hands.
3) Be careful of edges and corners as these may cut.
CAUTION: 1) When you change a component, be sure the replacement component
meets the required specifications. Never use foreign parts, to avoid any
risk of damage to the computer.
2) To avoid any risk of short-circuit, fire or other internal damage, never
allow any metal objects such as screws or paper clips to fall into the unit.
Be sure to replace screws with the same size as those removed. Make
sure all screws are securely fastened. Loose screws can cause short
circuits, resulting in heat, smoke or fire.
3) Before lifting out an FRU or other component, make sure all cables to
the component have been disconnected, in order to reduce the risk of
accidental electric shock.
4) If you use AC power, be sure to use the cable that came with the
computer or one recommended by Toshiba.
5) Make sure that all replacement components meet the specifications for
the computer and that all cables and connectors are securely fastened, in
order to avoid the risk of electric shock.
6) Some parts inside the computer, such as the CPU and cooling module,
become very hot during operation. Conduct repair work after they have
cooled. Be careful around the CPU and cooling module to avoid burns.

4-2

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.1 General

4 Replacement Procedures

Before You Begin
Look over the procedures in this section before you begin disassembling the computer. Familiarize
yourself with the disassembly and reassembly steps. Begin each procedure by removing the AC
adapter and the battery pack as instructed in this section:
1. Do not disassemble the computer unless it is operating abnormally.
2. Use only the correct and approved tools.
3. Make sure the working environment is free from the following elements whether you are
using or storing the computer.
•
•
•

Dust and contaminates
Static electricity
Extreme heat, cold and humidity

4. Make sure the FRU you are replacing is causing the abnormal operation by performing the
necessary diagnostics tests described in this manual.
5. Do not perform any operations that are not necessary and use only the described
procedures for disassembling and installing FRUs in the computer.
6. After removing parts from the computer, place them in a safe place away from the computer
so they will not be damaged and will not interfere with your work.
7. You will remove and replace many screws when you disassemble the computer. When you
remove screws, make sure they are placed in a safe place and identified with the correct
parts.
8. When assembling the computer make sure you use the correct screws to secure the various
pieces in place. Screw sizes are listed in their corresponding figures.
9. The computer contains many sharp edges and corners, so be careful not to injure yourself.
10. After you have replaced an FRU, make sure the computer is functioning properly by
performing the appropriate test on the FRU you have fixed or replaced.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-3

4 Replacement Procedures

4.1 General

Disassembly Procedures
The computer has two basic types of cable connectors:
•
•
•

Pressure Plate Connectors
Coaxial Cable Connectors
Normal Pin Connectors

To disconnect a Pressure Plate connector, lift up the tabs on either side of the connector’s plastic
pressure plate and slide the cable out of the connector. To connect the cable to a Pressure Plate
connector, make sure the pressure plate is fully lifted and slide the cable into the connector. Secure
the cable in place by pushing the sides of the pressure plate down so the plate is flush with the sides
of the connector. Gently pull on the cable to make sure the cable is secure. If you pull out the
connector, connect it again making sure the connector’s pressure plate is fully lifted when you insert
the cable.
Coaxial cables should be disconnected with an antenna coaxial disconnector.
Standard pin connectors are used with all other cables. These connectors can be connected and
disconnected by simply pulling them apart or pushing them together.
Assembly Procedures
After you have disassembled the computer and fixed or repaired the problem that was causing the
computer to operate abnormally, you will need to reassemble the computer.
Install all the removed FRUs following the steps described in the corresponding sections in this
chapter.
While assembling the computer, remember the following general points:

4-4

•

Take your time, making sure you follow the instructions closely. Most problems arise
when you get in a hurry assembling the computer.

•

Make sure all cables and connectors are securely fastened.

•

Before securing the FRU or other parts, make sure that screws or the FRU will pinch
no cables.

•

Check that all latches are closed securely in place.

•

Make sure all the correct screws are used to secure all FRUs. Using the wrong screw
can either damage the threads on the screw or the head of the screw and may prevent
proper seating of an FRU.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.1 General

4 Replacement Procedures

After installing an FRU in the computer, confirm that the FRU and the computer are functioning
properly.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-5

4 Replacement Procedures

4.1 General

Tools and Equipment
The use of Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) equipment is very important for your safety and the safety
of those around you. Proper use of these devices will increase the success rate of your repairs and
lower the cost for damaged or destroyed parts. The following equipment is necessary to
disassemble and reassemble the computer:

4-6

•

One M2 point size 0 Phillips screwdriver to remove and replace screws.

•

One 4 mm flat-blade screwdriver.

•

Tweezers, to lift out screws that you cannot grasp with your fingers.

•

ESD mats for the floor and the table you are working on.

•

An ESD wrist strap or heel grounder.

•

Anti-static carpeting or flooring.

•

Air ionizers in highly static sensitive areas.

•

Plastic card of the size of credit card.

•

Antenna coaxial cable disconnector

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.1 General

4 Replacement Procedures

Screw Tightening Torque
When you fasten screws, be sure to follow the torque list below.
CAUTION: Overtightening can damage components and screws;
undertightening can result in electrical shorts or other damage if screws or
components come loose.
NOTE: Toshiba recommends that you use an electric screw driver for quick and
easy operations.
•

M2

0.17 N·m (1.7 kgf·cm)

•

M2.5

0.30 N·m (3.0 kgf·cm)

•

M3

0.57 N·m (5.6 kgf·cm)

NOTE: The computer contains several flat head screws. These screws have less
contact area with the screwdriver, so be careful to press firmly enough to prevent
the screwdriver from slipping out and damaging the screw head.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-7

4 Replacement Procedures

4.1 General

Color of Screw Shaft
To avoid mistakes on the screw length, screw shafts are colored as follows:
q Even number length screw:

brown

q Odd number length screw:

white

q Special length screw:

blue

Screws whose lengths are indicated to one or more decimal places such as 2.5 mm or 2.8
mm.

Marking of Screws on the Computer Body
To make maintenance of the computer easier, markings of the kinds of the screws including the
types and lengths of the screws are indicated on the computer body.
Kind of screws

Symbol

q BIND screw

B

q FLAT HEAD screw

F

q SUPER FLAT HEAD screw

S

q TAPPING screw

T

q Other screws
(Unique screws, STUD, etc.)

U

Examples:
q 6 mm BIND screw

B6

q 12 mm BIND screw

B12

q 5 mm FLAT HEAD screw

F5

q (Indicates the screwed length in round number regardless the length of the stud.)

4-8

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.2 Battery Pack

4.2

4 Replacement Procedures

Battery Pack

Removing the Battery Pack
To remove the battery pack, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-1.
CAUTION: When handling battery packs, be careful not to short circuit the terminals.
Also do not drop, hit or apply impact; do not scratch, break, twist or bend the battery
pack.
1. Turn off the computer.
2. Disconnect the AC cable and other external devices from the computer.
3. Turn the computer face down.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-9

4 Replacement Procedures

4.2 Battery Pack

4. While sliding the battery latch, insert your finger into the slot, then pull the battery pack to
the arrow direction in the figure below and lift it out.
NOTE: For environmental reasons, do not throw away a spent battery pack.
Collect the spent battery packs.

Battery pack

Slot

Latch

Figure 4-1 Removing the Battery pack

4-10

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.2 Battery Pack

4 Replacement Procedures

Installing the Battery Pack
To install the battery pack, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-1.
CAUTION: The battery pack is a lithium ion battery, which can explode if not properly
replaced, used, handled or disposed of. For environmental reasons, collect the spent
battery packs. Use only batteries recommended by Toshiba as replacements.
NOTE: Check the battery's terminals visually. If they are dirty, wipe them clean with a
dry cloth.
1. Insert the battery pack into the opposite side of the battery connector.
2. Push the battery pack toward the connector. Make sure the battery pack is installed
securely.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-11

4 Replacement Procedures

4.3

4.3 Optional PC Card

Optional PC Card

Removing an Optional PC Card
To remove a PC card (option), follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-2.
CAUTION: Before you remove a PC card, refer to the card's documentation and to your
operating system documentation for proper procedures and precautions.
1. Turn the computer face up.
2. Press the eject button for the PC card you want to remove to extend the button.
3. Press the extended eject button to pop the PC card out slightly.
4. Grasp the PC card and pull it out.

PC card

Eject button
Figure 4-2 Removing a PC card

4-12

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.3 Optional PC Card

4 Replacement Procedures

Installing an Optional PC Card
To install a PC card, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-2.
1. Insert a PC card.
2. Push it carefully to ensure a firm connection.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-13

4 Replacement Procedures

4.4

4.4 Optional SD Card

Optional SD Card

Removing an Optional SD Card
To remove an SD card (option), follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-3.
CAUTION: Before you remove an SD card, refer to the card's documentation and to
your operating system documentation for proper procedures and precautions.

1. Turn the computer face up.
2. Push the SD card in (indicated as “1” in the figure below) and release it to pop the card out
slightly.
3. Grasp the SD card and pull it out (indicated as “2” in the figure below).

SD card

Figure 4-3 Removing an SD card

Installing an Optional SD Card
To install an SD card (option), follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-3.
1. Insert an SD card.

4-14

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.4 Optional SD Card

4 Replacement Procedures

2. Push it carefully to ensure a firm connection.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-15

4 Replacement Procedures

4.5

4.5 HDD

HDD

CAUTION: When handling the HDD, do not press the top surface as shown by the arrow.
Hold it by the sides.

HDD

Removing the HDD
To remove the HDD, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-4 to 4-6.
1. Turn the computer upside down.

4-16

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.5 HDD

4 Replacement Procedures

2. Remove the following screw securing the HDD cover. Remove the HDD cover by lifting up.
•

M2.5×4

FLAT HEAD screw

×1
M2.5×4 FLAT HEAD screw

HDD cover

Figure 4-4 Removing the HDD cover

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-17

4 Replacement Procedures

4.5 HDD

3. Pull the guide of the HDD pack and remove HDD pack. Be careful not to damage the
connector.

Guide
HDD pack

Figure 4-5 Removing the HDD pack

4-18

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.5 HDD

4 Replacement Procedures

NOTE: The following steps describe how to disassemble the HDD pack; however, do not
disassemble if the HDD is working properly.

5. Place the HDD pack on a flat surface, and remove the following screws.
•

M3×4 FLAT screw

×4

6. Remove the HDD bracket.
CAUTION: Do not apply pressure to the top or bottom of the HDD.

M3×4 FLAT screw

M3×4 FLAT screw
HDD bracket

Figure 4-6 Removing the HDD bracket

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-19

4 Replacement Procedures

4.5 HDD

Installing th e HDD
To install the HDD, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-4 to 4-6.
CAUTION: Do not hold the HDD by its top and bottom flat surfaces. It may damage the
HDD.
1. Seat the HDD in the bracket.
2. Secure the HDD to the HDD bracket with the following screws.
•

M3×4 FLAT screw

×4

CAUTION: Do not apply pressure to the middle of the HDD pack. It may
damage the HDD pack. Hold the HDD pack by its corners.
3. Hold the HDD pack by its corners and place it in the dent. Slide the HDD pack to the
connector of the computer to connect. Press to ensure a firm connection.
4. Fold the guide not to cover the screw hole on the HDD cover. Seat the HDD cover and
secure it with the following screw.
•

4-20

M2.5×4

FLAT HEAD screw

×1

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.6 Slim Select Bay Module

4.6

4 Replacement Procedures

Slim Select Bay Module

Removing the Slim Select Bay Module
To remove the slim select bay module, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-7 and 4-8.
CAUTION: The slim select bay module can become hot with use. Be careful when
removing the module.

1. Remove the following screw securing the slim select bay module from the screw hole for
lock, and tighten the removed screw in the screw hole for release. (The slim select bay is
unlocked.)
•

M2.5×4

FLAT HEAD screw

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

×1

4-21

4 Replacement Procedures

4.6 Slim Select Bay Module

2. While sliding the latch toward the arrow direction in the figure, slide the slim select bay
module outward to disconnect it from PJ1511 on the system board.

Screw hole for lock

Latch

M2.5×4 FLAT HEAD screw
Screw hole for release

Slim select bay module

Figure 4-7 Removing the Slim select bay module (for example DVD-ROM drive)

4-22

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.6 Slim Select Bay Module

4 Replacement Procedures

3. Remove the following screws securing the connector and plastic brace.
•

M2×8 BIND screw

×2

4. Remove the connector and plastic brace from the slim select bay module.
5. Remove the following screws securing the plastic frame.
•

M2×3 SUPER FLAT screw

×5

M2 ×3 SUPER FLAT screw

Plastic frame

Connector
Plastic brace

M2 ×3 SUPER FLAT screw
M2×8 BIND screw

Figure 4-8 Disassembling the Slim select bay module (for example DVD-ROM drive)

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-23

4 Replacement Procedures

4.6 Slim Select Bay Module

Installing the Slim Select Bay Module
To install the slim select bay module, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-7 and 4-8.
1. Seat the plastic frame on the side of the slim select bay module, and secure it with the
following screws.
•

×5

M2×3 SUPER FLAT screw

2. Install the connector and plastic brace and secure them with the following screws.
•

M2×8 BIND screw

×2

3. Slide the slim select bay module into the computer to connect it to PJ1511 on the system
board.
4. Remove the following screw tightened when removing the slim select bay module. Then
secure the removed screw in the next screw hole. (The slim select bay is locked.)
•

4-24

M2.5×4

FLAT HEAD screw

×1

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.7 Modem Daughter Card

4.7

4 Replacement Procedures

Modem Daughter Card

Removing the Modem Daughter Card
To remove the modem daughter card, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-9 and 4-10.
1. Remove the following screw securing the modem daughter card cover. Insert your finger
into the slot and remove the cover by lifting it up from the side of screw hole.
•

M2.5×4 FLAT HEAD screw

Modem daughter card cover

×1

M2.5×4 FLAT HEAD screw

Slot

Figure 4-9 Removing the Modem daughter card cover

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-25

4 Replacement Procedures

4.7 Modem Daughter Card

2. Remove the following screws securing the modem daughter card.
•

M2×4 BIND screw

×2

3. Lift up the modem daughter card to disconnect it from PJ2017 on the sound board by
pulling up the insulator.
4. Disconnect the modem cable from JP1 on the modem daughter card.

NOTE: To remove the modem cable from the system board, refer to 4.22 System
Board/RTC Battery/DC-IN jack.
M2×4 BIND screw

JP1

Modem daughter card

PJ2017

Modem cable

Insulator

Figure 4-10 Removing the Modem daughter card

4-26

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.7 Modem Daughter Card

4 Replacement Procedures

Installing the Modem Daughter Card
To install the modem daughter card, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-9 and 4-10.
NOTE: To install the modem cable to the system board, refer to 4.22 System Board/RTC
Battery/DC-IN Jack.
1. Connect the modem cable to JP1 on the modem daughter card.
2. Seat the modem daughter card and press carefully on the card to connect it to PJ2017 on
the sound board. Be careful not to damage the card or connector.
3. Secure the modem daughter card with the following screws.
•

M2×4 BIND screw

×2

4. Place the modem daughter card cover and secure it with the following screw.
•

M2.5×4 FLAT HEAD screw

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

×1

4-27

4 Replacement Procedures

4.8

4.8 CPU

CPU

Removing the CPU
To remove the CPU, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-11 to 4-13.
CAUTION: 1) The CPU can become very hot during operation. Be sure to let it cool
before starting repair work.
2) When you remove the CPU, wipe the grease off of the bottom of the fin
and top of the CPU. Apply new grease when installing.
1. Remove the following screws securing the CPU cover. Insert your finger into the slot and
remove the CPU cover while supporting the “A” side in the figure below.

4-28

•

M2.5×4

FLAT HEAD screw

×3

•

M2.5×16 FLAT HEAD screw

×1

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.8 CPU

4 Replacement Procedures

M2.5×16 FLAT HEAD screw

A

M2.5×4 FLAT HEAD screw

CPU cover

M2.5×4 FLAT HEAD screw

Slot

Figure 4-11 Removing the CPU cover
2. Remove the following screws securing the CPU holder. Lift the “2” side of the CPU holder
first, then rotate the holder 90 degrees counterclockwise. Then lift the “1” side of the CPU
holder and remove the holder.
•

M2×6

BIND screw

×4

3. Remove the fin.
CAUTION: Silicon grease is applied between the fin and the CPU. When
removing the fin, be careful not to damage the CPU under the fin.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-29

4 Replacement Procedures

4.8 CPU

Fin

M2×6 BIND screw

CPU holder
2

1

M2× 6 BIND screw

Figure4-12 Removing the Fin

4-30

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.8 CPU

4 Replacement Procedures

4. Turn the cam to the unlock position with a flat-blade screwdriver to unlock the CPU.

Figure 4-13 Unlocking the CPU
4. Lift up the CPU.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-31

4 Replacement Procedures

4.8 CPU

Installing the CPU
To install the CPU, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-11 to 4-14.
1. Make sure the cam is in the open position.
2. Seat the CPU in the CPU socket. Make sure the alignment is exact to avoid damaging pins
on the CPU.
3. Press the interposer gently with your fingers and turn the cam on the CPU socket to the
lock position with a flat-blade screwdriver to secure the CPU.
4. Apply new grease on the CPU using a special syringe as shown in the following figure.
Apply quarter of scale (0.25ml) of grease evenly on the CPU chip. When silicon grease is
already applied to the CPU, wipe them off with a close in advance.
CAUTION: When installing the CPU, apply new grease on the top of the CPU
chip. When installing the fin, make sure the bottom of the fin covers the top of the
CPU.

CPU chip

Figure 4-14 Applying new grease

4-32

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.8 CPU

4 Replacement Procedures

5. Install the fin.
6. Insert the “1” side of the CPU holder into the empty space, with rotated 90 degrees
counterclockwise first. Then rotate it 90 degrees clockwise and fit the two holes of the CPU
holder to the bosses on the fin.
7. Secure the CPU holder with the following screws.
•

M2×6

BIND screw

×4

8. Place the CPU cover and secure it with the following screws.
•

M2.5×4

FLAT HEAD screw

×3

•

M2.5×16 FLAT HEAD screw

×1

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-33

4 Replacement Procedures

4

4.9 Keyboard

Replacement Procedures

4.9

Keyboard

Removing the Keyboard
To remove the keyboard, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-15 to 4-17.
1. Turn the computer face up and open the display panel.
2. Insert your finger into the latches between the keyboard brace and the computer, and lift up
the keyboard brace to unlatch and remove it.

Keyboard brace

Figure 4-15 Removing the Keyboard brace

4-32

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.9 Keyboard

4 Replacement Procedures

3. Remove the following screws securing the keyboard.
•

×2

M2.5×2.8 FLAT HEAD screw

4. Remove the following screw securing the keyboard hold plate and remove the keyboard
hold plate.
•

M2.5×2.8 FLAT HEAD screw

M2.5×2.8 FLAT HEAD screw

×1

Keyboard hold plate

M2.5×2.8 FLAT HEAD screw

M2.5×2.8 FLAT HEAD screw

Figure 4-16 Removing the Keyboard

5. Rotate out the keyboard and lay it on top of the palm rest.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-33

4 Replacement Procedures

4.9 Keyboard

6. Remove the following screw securing the keyboard support plate and remove the keyboard
support plate.
•

M2.5×6

FLAT HEAD screw

×1

M2.5×6 FLAT HEAD screw
Keyboard support plate

Tabs

PJ123

Figure 4-17 Removing the Keyboard support plate
7. Disconnect the keyboard cable from PJ123 on the system board, and remove the
keyboard.

4-34

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.9 Keyboard

4 Replacement Procedures

Installing the Keyboard
To install the keyboard, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-15 to 4-17.
1. Place the keyboard face down on the palm rest.
2. Connect the keyboard cable to PJ123 on the system board.
3. Insert the tabs on the keyboard support plate first, then place the keyboard support plate on
the keyboard cable. Secure the keyboard support plate with the following screw.
•

M2.5×6

×1

FLAT HEAD screw

4. Align the tabs on the bottom of the keyboard with the holes on the top cover and rotate the
keyboard down.
5. Secure the keyboard with the following screws.
•

M2.5×2.8 FLAT HEAD screw

×2

6. Place the keyboard hold plate on the keyboard. Then secure the keyboard hold plate with
the following screw.
•

M2.5×2.8 FLAT HEAD screw

×1

7. Install the keyboard brace and press to secure the latches.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-35

4 Replacement Procedures

4.10 Memory Module

4.10 Memory Module
Removing a Memory Module
To remove a memory module, make sure the computer is in boot mode and powered off, follow the
steps below and refer to figure 4-18.
CAUTION: 1) Do not try to remove a memory module with the computer turned on.
The computer or the memory might be damaged.
2) Do not touch the connectors on the memory module(s) or on the
computer. Debris on the connectors may cause memory access problems.
1. Turn up the insulator covering the memory slots.
2. Press the two latches outward. One end of the memory module will pop up.
3. Grasp the memory module and pull it out to remove the memory module from PJ1001 (Slot
A) or PJ1002 (Slot B) on the system board.
Insulator

Latches

Memory slot A
Memory slot B

Memory module

Figure 4-18 Removing the Memory module

4-36

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.10 Memory Module

4 Replacement Procedures

Installing a Memory Module
To install a memory module, make sure that the computer is in boot mode and powered off, follow
the steps below and refer to figure 4-18.
CAUTION: 1) Do not install a memory module in slot B only. Use slot A prior to slot B.
Otherwise, the computer or the memory may be damaged.
2) Do not touch the connectors on the memory module or on the computer.
Debris on the connectors may cause memory access problems.

1. Turn up the insulator and insert a memory module into PJ1001 (Slot A) or PJ1002 (Slot B)
on the system board at an angle of 45 degrees and press carefully to ensure firm connection.
2. Push the memory module down until the latches on either side engage the memory module
to hold it in place.
3. Seat the insulator.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-37

4 Replacement Procedures

4.11 Sensor/Switch Board

4.11 Sensor/Switch Board
Removing the Sensor/Switch Board
To remove the sensor/switch board, make sure the computer is in boot mode and powered off,
follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-19.
1. Remove the following screws securing the sensor/switch board.
•

M2.5×2.8 FLAT HEAD screw

×2

2. Remove the sensor/switch board by lifting it up.
M2.5×2.8 FLAT HEAD screw

Sensor/switch board SUMI card

Sensor/Switch Board

Figure 4-19 Removing the Sensor/Switch board

4-38

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.11 Sensor/Switch Board

4 Replacement Procedures

3. Disconnect the sensor/switch board SUMI card from PJ3200 on the back of the
sensor/switch board.
NOTE: For removing the sensor/switch board SUMI card from the system
board, refer to 4.22 System Board/RTC Battery/DC -IN Jack.

Installing the Sensor/Switch Board
To install the sensor/switch board, make sure that the computer is in boot mode and powered off,
follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-19.
NOTE: For installing the sensor/switch board SUMI card to the system board, refer to
4.22 System Board/RTC Battery/DC-IN Jack.
1. Connect the sensor/switch board SUMI card on the system board to PJ3200 on the back
of the sensor/switch board.
2. Seat the sensor/switch board. Attach the two holes of the board to the bosses of the chassis.
3. Secure the sensor/switch board with the following screws.
•

M2.5×2.8 FLAT HEAD screw

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

×2

4-39

4 Replacement Procedures

4.12 Touch Pad

4.12 Touch Pad
Removing the Touch Pad
To remove the touch pad, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-20 to 4-22.
1. Turn the computer face down and remove the following nine screws securing the palm rest
to the display assembly.
•

M2.5×4

FLAT HEAD screw

×2 (“4” in the figure below)

•

M2.5×6

FLAT HEAD screw

×3 (“6” in the figure below)

•

M2.5×10 FLAT HEAD screw

×2 (“10” in the figure below)

•

M2.5×16 FLAT HEAD screw

×2 (“16” in the figure below)

16
6

10

10

16
6

4

4

6

Figure 4-20

4-40

Removing the Palm rest (1)

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.12 Touch Pad

4 Replacement Procedures

2. Disconnect the touch pad SUMI card from PJ2003 on the system board.
3. Remove the following screw securing the palm rest to the display assembly. Remove the
palm rest by rotating it up toward the front of the computer.
•

M2.5×4

FLAT HEAD screw

×1

M2.5×4 FLAT HEAD screw
PJ2003

Touch pad SUMI card
Palm rest

Figure 4-21

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

Removing the Palm rest (2)

4-41

4 Replacement Procedures

4.12 Touch Pad

4. Remove the following screws securing the touch pad and touch pad switch to the palm rest.
•

M2.5×4

FLAT HEAD screw

×2

•

M2.5×4

TAPPING screw

×2

5. Remove the touch pad and touch pad switch from the front of the palm rest.

Touch pad switch
Touch pad

Touch pad SUMI card

Palm rest

M2.5×4 FLAT HEAD screw

M2.5 ×4 TAPPING screw

Figure 4-22

Removing the Touch pad and Touch pad switch

6. Disconnect the touch pad SUMI card from CN1 on the touch pad.

4-42

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.12 Touch Pad

4 Replacement Procedures

Installing the Touch Pad
To install the touch pad, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-20 to 4-22.
1. Connect the touch pad SUMI card to CN1 on the touch pad.
2. Install the touch pad and touch pad switches on the palm rest and pass the touch pad SUMI
card into the hole of the palm rest. Secure them with the following screws.
•

M2.5×4

FLAT HEAD screw

×2

•

M2.5×4

TAPPING screw

×2

3. Place the palm rest on the display assembly and secure the latches by pressing it. Secure the
palm rest with the following screw.
•

M2.5×4

FLAT HEAD screw

×1

4. Connect the touch pad SUMI card to PJ2003 on the system board.
5. Close the display panel and turn the computer face down. Secure the palm rest with the
following screws to the display assembly.
•

M2.5×4

FLAT HEAD screw

×2

•

M2.5×6

FLAT HEAD screw

×3

•

M2.5×10 FLAT HEAD screw

×2

•

M2.5×16 FLAT HEAD screw

×2

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-43

4 Replacement Procedures

4.13 Wireless LAN Card

4.13 Wireless LAN Card
Removing the Wireless LAN Card
To remove the wireless LAN card, make sure the computer is in boot mode and powered off,
follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-23 and 4-24.
NOTE: The wireless LAN card is an option in some models. This computer supports two
types of wireless LAN card (802.11/b or 802.11a/b combo). In this section,
removing/installing a wireless LAN card for a/b combo model is described for example.
CAUTION: Do not try to remove the wireless LAN card with the computer turned on.
You can damage the computer or the wireless LAN card. Do not touch the connectors on
the wireless LAN card module on the computer. Debris on the connectors may cause
wireless LAN card access problems.

1. (For a/b combo models only)
Remove the following screw securing the wireless LAN card cover.
•

M2×4 OSG screw
M2 ×4 OSG screw

×1
Wireless LAN card cover

Figure 4-23 Removing the Wireless LAN card cover

4-44

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.13 Wireless LAN Card

4 Replacement Procedures

2. Disconnect the wireless LAN antenna cables (black and white) from the wireless LAN card
using an antenna coaxial cable disconnector.

Wireless LAN antenna cable
(white)

Wireless LAN card

Wireless LAN antenna cable
(black)

Latches

Figure 4-24 Removing the Wireless LAN card

3. Press the latches outward to release the wireless LAN card. It will pop up to about a 45degree angle.
4. Disconnect the wireless LAN card from PJ2015 on the system board. Be careful not to
damage the connector.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-45

4 Replacement Procedures

4.13 Wireless LAN Card

Installing the Wireless LAN Card
To install the wireless LAN card, make sure that the computer is in boot mode and powered off,
follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-23 and 4-24.
CAUTION: Be sure to switch the computer off before removing the wireless LAN card.
Otherwise, the computer or the wireless LAN card may be damaged.

1. Insert the wireless LAN card into the connector at an angle of 45 degrees.
2. Gently push the wireless LAN card down until the latches on both sides engage the wireless
LAN card to hold it in place.
3. Connect the wireless LAN antenna cables (black and white) to the connectors on the
wireless LAN card.
4. (For a/b combo models only)
Install the wireless LAN card cover and secure it with the following screw.
•

M2×4 OSG screw

×1

CAUTION: There are two MAC address barcode labels in the package
containing the new wireless LAN card. Apply one label next to the wireless LAN
socket and one on the box the computer was shipped in. Before you apply the new
labels, remove the old ones from the computer and the box. The computer may
have MAC address barcode labels for both wired and wireless LANs. Be sure to
replace the correct label.

4-46

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.14 Bluetooth Module

4 Replacement Procedures

4.14 Bluetooth Module
Removing the Bluetooth Module
To remove the Bluetooth module, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-25.
CAUTION: Do not try to remove the Bluetooth module with the computer turned on.
You can damage the computer or Bluetooth module. Do not touch the connectors on the
Bluetooth module on the computer. Debris on the connectors may cause Bluetooth access
problems.

1. Remove the Bluetooth coaxial cable (brown) from the Bluetooth module using an antenna
coaxial cable disconnector.
2. Remove the following screw securing the Bluetooth module.
•

M2×3 SUPER FLAT screw

×1

3. Lift up the Bluetooth module and disconnect the Bluetooth SUMI card from PJ4900 on the
system board.
4. Remove the Bluetooth SUMI card from the connector on the Bluetooth module.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-47

4 Replacement Procedures

4.14 Bluetooth Module
M2×3 SUPER FLAT screw

Bluetooth SUMI card
PJ4900

Bluetooth module

Bluetooth antenna cable

Figure4-25 Removing the Bluetooth module

Installing the Bluetooth Module
To install the Bluetooth module, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-25.
1. Connect the Bluetooth SUMI card to the connector on the Bluetooth module.
2. Connect the Bluetooth SUMI card to PJ4900 on the system board.
3. Place the Bluetooth module.
4. Secure the Bluetooth module with the following screw.
•

M2×3 SUPER FLAT screw

×1

5. Connect the Bluetooth coaxial cable (brown) to the Bluetooth module.

4-48

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.15 Display Assembly

4 Replacement Procedures

4.15 Display Assembly
Removing the Display Assembly
To remove the display assembly, follow the steps below and refer to figures
4-26 to 4-28.
1. Turn the computer face down, and remove the following nine screws:
•
•

×3 (“4” in the figure below)
×6 (“16” in the figure below)

M2.5×4 FLAT HEAD screw
M2.5×16 FLAT HEAD screw
16

16
16
16
16
4
4

4
16

Figure 4-26 Removing the Display assembly (1)

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-49

4 Replacement Procedures

4.15 Display Assembly

2. Turn the computer face up and open the display panel.
3. Remove the following screws securing the display assembly.
•

M2.5×6

FLAT HEAD screw

×2

•

M2.5×4

FLAT HEAD screw

×1

4. Turn up the insulator covering the LCD cable and disconnect the LCD cable from PJ5500
on the system board.
5. Turn up the insulator covering the speaker cables and disconnect the two speaker cables
from PJ2026 (R, red) and PJ2027 (L, blue) on the system board.
6. Remove the glass tape covering the internal microphone cable. Disconnect the internal
microphone cable from PJ3001 on the sound board.

4-50

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.15 Display Assembly

4 Replacement Procedures
LCD cable

Speaker cables

PJ5500

M2.5×4
FLAT HEAD screw

M2.5×6
FLAT HEAD screw

PJ2027
PJ2026
Internal microphone cable

PJ3001

Sound board

Glass tape

Figure 4-27 Removing the Display assembly (2)

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-51

4 Replacement Procedures

4.15 Display Assembly

7. Remove the display assembly from the base assembly.

Display assembly

Base assembly

Figure 4-28 Removing the Display assembly (2)

NOTE: When removing the display assembly, be careful not to damage any
cables.

4-52

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.15 Display Assembly

4 Replacement Procedures

Installing the Display Assembly
To install the display assembly, follow the steps below and refer to figures
4-26 and 4-28.
1. Install the display assembly on the base assembly.
NOTE: When installing the display assembly, be careful not to pinch or damage
any cables.
2. Press along the edges of the display assembly to secure the latches.
3. Connect the internal microphone cable to PJ3001 on the sound board and stick the glass
tape on it.
4. Turn up the insulator and connect the LCD cable to PJ5500 on the system board.
5. Turn up the insulator and connect the two speaker cables to PJ2026 (R, red) and PJ2027
(L, blue) on the system board.
6. Secure the display assembly with the following screws.
•

M2.5×6

FLAT HEAD screw

×2

•

M2.5×4

FLAT HEAD screw

×1

7. Turn the computer face down and secure the display assembly with the following nine
screws:
•

M2.5×4

FLAT HEAD screw

×3

•

M2.5×16 FLAT HEAD screw

×6

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-53

4 Replacement Procedures

4.16 LED Board

4.16 LED Board
Removing the LED Board
To remove the LED board, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-29.
1. Remove the glass tape securing the LED board SUMI card and USB cable.
2. Disconnect the LED board SUMI card from PJ1101 on the system board.
3. Remove the following screws securing the LED board and remove the LED board.
•

M2.5×4

FLAT HEAD screw

×2

4. Disconnect the LED board SUMI card from PJ3100 on the LED board.

LED board SUMI card

Glass tape

M2.5×4 FLAT HEAD screw

PJ1101
PJ3100

USB cable
M2.5 × 4 FLAT HEAD screw
LED Board

Figure 4-29 Removing the LED board

4-54

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.16 LED Board

4 Replacement Procedures

Installing the LED Board
To install the LED board, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-29.
1. Connect the LED board SUMI card to PJ3100 on the LED board.
2. Place the LED board and secure it with the following screws.
•

M2.5×4

FLAT HEAD screws

×2

3. Connect the LED board SUMI card to PJ1101 on the system board.
4. Stick the glass tape to secure the LED board SUMI card and USB cable.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-55

4 Replacement Procedures

4.17 Sound Board

4.17 Sound Board
Removing the Sound Board
To remove the sound board, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-30.
CAUTION: When the sound board is installed on the system board outside of the chassis,
do not connect or disconnect a cable to the headphone or microphone jack repeatedly for
check. Before checking the jacks, install the sound board on the system board, and secure
them with one screw. Otherwise, load might be applied to PJ3000 on the sound board or
PJ1100 on the system board and cause solder crack.
1. Remove the following screw securing the sound board.
•

M2.5×4

FLAT HEAD screw

×1

2. Lift up the sound board to disconnect PJ3000 on the back of the sound board from PJ1100
on the system board. Lift up the board toward the side of jacks.

4-56

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.17 Sound Board

4 Replacement Procedures
M2.5×4 FLAT HEAD screw

Sound Board
Jacks

PJ3000

Figure 4-30 Removing the Sound board

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-57

4 Replacement Procedures

4.17 Sound Board

Installing the Sound Board
To install the sound board, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-30.
1. Install the sound board and press it to connect PJ3000 on the back of the sound board to
PJ1100 on the system board. When installing the sound board, insert the two jacks and a
volume controller into the hole of the chassis first.
2. Secure the sound board with the following screw.
•

4-58

M2.5×4

FLAT HEAD screw

×1

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.18 System Board/RTC Battery/DC-IN Jack

4 Replacement Procedures

4.18 System Board/RTC Battery/DC-IN Jack
WARNING: When replacing the RTC battery, be sure to use genuine batteries or
replacement batteries authorized by Toshiba. Installing the wrong battery could cause a
battery explosion or other damage.
If the RTC battery is found abnormal, it must not be installed. Replace it with a new
battery, and dispose of the old one according to the local regulations.

Check for any of the following signs of damage:

1)

Electrolyte leakage
• Corrosion (greenish color) on the battery connector or cable
• Corrosion on the computer's battery connector
• White powder on any part of the battery
• White powder in the battery tray
• Clear liquid on the battery
• Clear liquid in the battery tray
• Clear liquid on any board near the battery

2)

Damage to the connection cable

3)

Damage to the connector housing

If any powder or liquid is found in or around the battery tray, clean it. Be careful not to let
any leaked material contact your eyes or mouth. Do not inhale fumes from leaked
material.
If leaked material contacts your skin, eyes or mouth, wash the affected area thoroughly
with clean water.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-59

4 Replacement Procedures

4.18 System Board/RTC Battery/DC-IN Jack

Removing the System Board/RTC Battery/DC-IN Jack
To remove the system board/RTC battery/DC-IN jack, follow the steps below and refer to figures
4-31 to 4-33.
1. Disconnect the sensor/switch board SUMI card from PJ1000 on the system board.
2. Disconnect the DC-IN cable from PJ8800 on the system board.
3. Disconnect the RTC battery cable from PJ1005 on the system board and remove the RTC
battery.
4. Remove the glass tape securing the USB cable. Then disconnect the USB cable from
PJ1004 on the system board.
5. Remove the glass tape securing the fan cable. Then disconnect the fan cable from PJ8770
on the system board.

Sensor/Switch board SUMI card

DC-IN cable

PJ8800
PJ1005

PJ1000
Glass tape

RTC battery

PJ8770

USB cable
Fan cable
Glass tape
PJ1004

Figure 4-31 Removing the System board/RTC Battery/DC-IN Jack (1)

4-60

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.18 System Board/RTC Battery/DC-IN Jack

4 Replacement Procedures

6. Remove the following screws securing the system board.
•

M2.5×4

FLAT HEAD screw

×4

•

M2.5×10 FLAT HEAD screw

×1
M2.5×4 FLAT HEAD screw

M2.5×10 FLAT HEAD screw

PJ1003

M2.5×4 FLAT HEAD screw

System Board
Modem cable

Figure 4-32 Removing the System board/RTC Battery/DC -IN Jack (2)
7. Lift up the system board and remove it.
NOTE: When removing the system board, be careful not to damage the modem
cable on the back of the system board.
8. Disconnect the modem cable from PJ1003 on the back of the system board and remove the
modem cable.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-61

4 Replacement Procedures

4.18 System Board/RTC Battery/DC-IN Jack

9. Remove the DC-IN jack from the chassis.

DC-IN jack

Figure 4-33 Removing the DC-IN jack

4-62

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.18 System Board/RTC Battery/DC-IN Jack

4 Replacement Procedures

Installing the System Board/RTC Battery/DC-IN Jack
To install the system board/RTC battery/DC-IN jack, follow the steps below and refer to figures 431 to 4-33.
1. Install the DC-IN jack on the chassis.
2. Connect the modem cable to PJ1003 on the back of the system board and pass the cable
under the insulator on the side of the CPU.
3. Install the system board. Pass the modem cable toward back through the hole for the CPU
of the chassis. Set the cable into the hole of the insulator for modem daughter card.
NOTE: When installing the system board, be careful not to pinch or damage the
USB cable, DC -IN cable, modem cable or RTC battery cable.
4. Secure the system board with the following screws.
•

M2.5×4

FLAT HEAD screw

×4

•

M2.5×10 FLAT HEAD screw

×1

5. Connect the fan cable to PJ8770 on the system board. Then stick the glass tape to secure
the fan cable.
6. Connect the USB cable to PJ1004 on the system board. Then stick the glass tape to secure
the USB cable.
7. Connect the RTC battery cable to PJ1005 on the system board. Install the RTC battery
vertically into the empty space between the system board and chassis.
8. Connect the DC-IN cable to PJ8800 on the system board.
9. Connect the sensor/switch board SUMI card to PJ1000 on the system board.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-63

4 Replacement Procedures

4

4.19 USB Board

Replacement Procedures

4.19 USB Board
Removing the USB Board
To remove the USB board, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-34.
1. Remove the following screw securing the USB board.
•

M2.5×4

FLAT HEAD screw

×1

2. Remove the USB cable from the two guides and remove the USB board by lifting it up
directly.

M2.5×4 FLAT HEAD screw
USB Board

USB cable

Figure 4-34 Removing the USB board

4-62

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.19 USB Board

4 Replacement Procedures

Installing the USB Board
To install the USB board, follow the steps below and refer to the figure 4-34.
1. Fit the USB cable to the two guides and install the USB board with its hole attached to the
boss of the chassis.
2. Secure the USB board with the following screw.
•

M2.5×4

FLAT HEAD screw

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

×1

4-63

4 Replacement Procedures

4.20 Fan

4.20 Fan
Removing the Fan
To remove the fan, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-35.
1. Remove the following screws securing the fan.
•

M2.5×6

FLAT HEAD screw

×2

2. Remove the fan.
M2.5×6 FLAT HEAD screw

Fan

Figure4-35 Removing the Fan

4-64

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.20 Fan

4 Replacement Procedures

Installing the Fan
To install the fan, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-35.
1. Place the fan.
2. Secure the fan with the following screws.
•

M2.5×6

FLAT HEAD screw

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

×2

4-65

4 Replacement Procedures

4.21 Display Mask

4.21 Display Mask
Removing the Display Mask
To remove the display mask, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-36 and 4-37.
1. Remove the two mask seals at the lower part of the display mask.
2. Remove the following screws securing the display mask.
•

M2.5×6

FLAT HEAD screw

×2

M2.5×6 FLAT HEAD screw

Mask seals

Display mask

Figure 4-36 Removing the Display mask (1)

4-66

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.21 Display Mask

4 Replacement Procedures

3. Release the latches on the display mask and remove the display mask.
Display mask

Figure 4-37 Removing the Display mask (2)

Installing the Display Mask
To install the display mask, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-36 and 4-37.
1. Install the display mask on the LCD module.
2. Fasten the latches of the display mask.
3. Secure the display mask with the following screws.
•

M2.5×6

FLAT HEAD screw

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

×2

4-67

4 Replacement Procedures

4.21 Display Mask

4. Stick the two mask seals on the top of screws.

4-68

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.22 FL Inverter

4 Replacement Procedures

4.22 FL Inverter
Removing the FL Inverter
To remove the FL inverter, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-38.
1. Remove the following screw securing the FL inverter.
•

M2×3 SUPER FLAT screw

×1

2. Disconnect the FL cable under the insulator from the FL inverter.
3. Disconnect the HV cable from the FL inverter.
4. Remove the FL inverter.

M2×3 SUPER FLAT screw
FL inverter

FL cable

HV cable

Figure 4-38 Removing the FL inverter

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-69

4 Replacement Procedures

4.22 FL Inverter

Installing the FL Inverter
To install the FL inverter, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-38.
1. Connect the FL cable and the HV cable to the FL inverter.
2. Seat the FL inverter and stick the insulator on the FL inverter of the FL cable side.
3. Secure the FL inverter with the following screw.
•

4-70

M2×3 SUPER FLAT screw

×1

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.23 LCD Module

4 Replacement Procedures

4.23 LCD Module
NOTE: 1) Be careful not to apply pressure to the ICs along the edge of LCD module.
The ICs are easily damaged.
2) For environmental reasons, do not throw away a malfunctioning LCD module
(or FL). Please follow local ordinances or regulations for its disposal.

Removing the LCD Module
To remove the LCD Module, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-39 and 4-40.
1. Remove the four mask seals on the sides of the LCD module.
2. Remove the following screws securing the LCD module.
•

M2×3 SUPER FLAT screw

×4

2. Carefully rotate out the top of the LCD module to access the LCD cable.
NOTE: When rotating the top of the LCD module, hold the corners of the LCD
module. The top edge of LCD module is sensitive area.
3. (For SXGA+ models only)
Remove the copper tape securing the LCD cable.
4. Remove the grass tape securing the LCD cable.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-71

4 Replacement Procedures

4.23 LCD Module

5. Disconnect the LCD cable and remove the LCD module.
CAUTION: When removing the LCD cable, be careful not to damage the
connector.

Copper tape
Connector

(For SXGA+ models only)

M2 × 3 SUPER FLAT screw

Glass tape
Mask seal

Mask seal
M2 ×3 SUPER FLAT screw

Figure 4-39 Removing the LCD module (1)

4-72

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.23 LCD Module

4 Replacement Procedures

6. Remove the following screws securing the two metal braces to the LCD module.
•

M2×3 SUPER FLAT screw

×4

M2×3 SUPER FLAT screw

LCD module

Metal brace

M2×3 SUPER FLAT screw
Figure 4-40 Removing the LCD module (2)

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-73

4 Replacement Procedures

4.23 LCD Module

Installing the LCD Module
To install the LCD module, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-39 and 4-40.
1. Secure the two metal braces to the LCD module with the following screws.
•

M2×3 SUPER FLAT screw

×4

2. Lean the LCD module against the lower side of the display cover.
3. Connect the LCD cable to the connector on the back of the LCD module. Stick the glass
tape on the LCD cable.
4. (For SXGA+ models only)
Stick the copper tape on the LCD cable and glass tape. Make sure the copper tape covers
the connector on the display cover and the LCD cable.
5. Seat the LCD module and secure it with the following screws.
•

M2×3 SUPER FLAT screw

×4

6. Stick the four mask seals on the sides of the LCD module.

4-74

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4 Replacement Procedures

4.24 Wireless LAN Antenna/Bluetooth Antenna/Disp lay Cover/Speaker

4.24 Wireless LAN Antenna/Bluetooth Antenna/Display
Cover/Speaker
Removing the Wireless LAN Antenna/Bluetooth Antenna/Display
Cover/Speaker
To remove the wireless LAN antenna/Bluetooth antenna/display cover/speaker, follow the steps
below and refer to figures 4-41 to 4-49.
NOTE: The left speaker cable and acetate tape securing the left speaker cable are
installed on the insulator depending on the type of the computer.

1. Turn the display assembly face down. Remove the acetate tape securing the right speaker
cable. Then remove the right speaker cable from the insulator. Remove the insulator from
the display assembly.
boss

boss

Right speaker cable
under the acetate tape

Insulator
Acetate tape

When the left speaker cable and acetate
tape are installed on the insulator,
remove the acetate tape and the left
speaker cable from the insulator.

Acetate tape

Left speaker cable

Right speaker cable

Insulator

Figure 4-41 Removing the Insulator

4-74

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.24 Wireless LAN Antenna/Bluetooth Antenna/Display Cover/Speaker

4 Replacement Procedures

2. Remove the following screws securing the cable holder and remove the cable holder.
•

M2.5×4

TAPPING screw

×2

M2.5×4 TAPPING screw

Cable holder

Figure 4-42 Removing the Cable holder

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-75

4 Replacement Procedures

4.24 Wireless LAN Antenna/Bluetooth Antenna/Display Cover/Speaker

3. Remove the two acetate tapes securing the wireless LAN antenna cables, Bluetooth
antenna cable (for wireless LAN/Bluetooth models only), and internal microphone cable.
Remove these cables from the guides and pull them from the side of the display cover.
Bluetooth antenna cable (brown)

Internal microphone cable
(gray)

Acetate tapes

LCD cable
Wireless LAN antenna cables
(black, white)

Figure 4-43 Removing the cables

4-76

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.24 Wireless LAN Antenna/Bluetooth Antenna/Display Cover/Speaker

4 Replacement Procedures

4. Turn the display assembly face up and open the display cover. Remove the following
screws securing the two hinges to the display cover.
•

M2.5×5

FLAT HEAD screw

×2

M2.5×5 FLAT HEAD screw
Hinge

Hinge
Figure 4-44 Removing the Hinge (1)

5. Remove the display cover from the display assembly. Be careful not to pinch or damage the
LCD cable.
6. Remove the internal microphone from the guide pin.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-77

4 Replacement Procedures

4.24 Wireless LAN Antenna/Bluetooth Antenna/Display Cover/Speaker

7. (for Wireless LAN/Bluetooth models only)
Remove four acetate tapes, then remove the wireless LAN antennas and Bluetooth antenna
from the display cover.

Wireless LAN antennas

Acetate tapes

Bluetooth antenna
Internal microphone

Figure 4-45 Removing the Wireless LAN/Bluetooth antenna

4-78

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.24 Wireless LAN Antenna/Bluetooth Antenna/Display Cover/Speaker

4 Replacement Procedures

8. Remove the following screw securing the metal plate on the LCD cable and remove the
metal plate. Remove the LCD cable from the display assembly.
•

M2.5×4

TAPPING screw

×1

M2.5×4 TAPPING screw

LCD cable

Metal plate

Figure 4-46 Removing the LCD cable

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-79

4 Replacement Procedures

4.24 Wireless LAN Antenna/Bluetooth Antenna/Display Cover/Speaker

9. Lay the display assembly face down. Remove the acetate tape securing the left speaker
cable. Release the cable from the guides.

Right speaker cable

Acetate tape

Left speaker cable

Figure 4-47 Removing the Speaker cable

4-80

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.24 Wireless LAN Antenna/Bluetooth Antenna/Display Cover/Speaker

4 Replacement Procedures

10. Remove the following screws securing the speakers and side covers. Remove the speakers
and side covers.
•

M2.5×4

FLAT HEAD screw

×2

•

M2.5×6

FLAT HEAD screw

×4

M2.5×4 FLAT HEAD screw
M2.5×4 FLAT HEAD screw

Speaker (right)
Speaker (left)

Side cover (right)

Side cover (left)

M2.5×6 FLAT HEAD screw
M2.5×6 FLAT HEAD screw

Figure 4-48 Removing the Speaker and Side cover

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-81

4 Replacement Procedures

4.24 Wireless LAN Antenna/Bluetooth Antenna/Display Cover/Speaker

11. Remove the following screws securing the two hinges to the display cover and remove the
hinges.
•

M2.5×6

FLAT HEAD screw

×2

M2.5×6 FLAT HEAD screw

Figure 4-49 Removing the Hinge (2)

4-82

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.24 Wireless LAN Antenna/Bluetooth Antenna/Display Cover/Speaker

4 Replacement Procedures

Installing the Wireless LAN Antenna/Bluetooth Antenna/Display Cover/Speaker
To install the wireless LAN antenna/Bluetooth antenna/display cover/speaker, follow the steps
below and refer to figures 4-41 to 4-50.
1. Install the two hinges into the hole on the back of the display assembly and secure the hinges
with the following screws.
•

M2.5×6 FLAT HEAD screw

×2

2. Install the side covers and speakers. Pass the speaker cables through the hole on the display
assembly. Secure the side covers and speakers with the following screws.
•

M2.5×4 FLAT HEAD screw

×2

•

M2.5×6 FLAT HEAD screw

×4

3. Stick the acetate tape to secure the left speaker cable.
4. Install the LCD cable and the metal plate on the display cover and secure it with the
following screw.
•

M2.5×4

TAPPING screw

×1

5. (For wireless LAN/Bluetooth models only)
Attach the following antennas with double-sided adhesive tapes in the order of the main
wireless LAN antenna (with white cable), Bluetooth antenna (with brown cable) and sub
wireless LAN antenna (with black cable) at the rear of the display cover.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-83

4 Replacement Procedures

4.24 Wireless LAN Antenna/Bluetooth Antenna/Display Cover/Speaker
Three ribs for each antenna

Main antenna

Sub antenna

Rib

Rib

Bluetooth antenna

Figure 4-50 Installing the wireless LAN/Bluetooth antenna
6. Install the internal microphone with its hole attached to the guide pin of the back of the
display cover.
7. Install the display cover to the display assembly. Pass the LCD cable through the hole from
the front of the display assembly toward the bottom. Secure the two hinges on the display
assembly to the display cover with the following screws.
•

M2.5×5

×2

FLAT HEAD screw

8. Pass the wireless LAN cables, Bluetooth cable (for wireless LAN/Bluetooth models only)
and internal microphone cable through the hole from the front toward the back of the
display assembly.
9. Hook the wireless LAN cables, Bluetooth cable (for wireless LAN/Bluetooth models only)
and internal microphone cable on the guides on the back of the display assembly. Stick the
two acetate tapes on these cables.
10. Install the cable holder on the wireless LAN antenna cables, Bluetooth antenna cable (for
wireless LAN/Bluetooth models only), internal microphone cable. Secure the holder with
the following screws.
•

M2.5×4 TAPPING screw

×2

11. Install the insulator to cover the back of the display assembly. Pass the right speaker cable
through the guides of the insulator.

4-84

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.24 Wireless LAN Antenna/Bluetooth Antenna/Display Cover/Speaker

4 Replacement Procedures

NOTE: The left speaker cable and acetate tape securing the left speaker cable are
installed on the insulator depending on the type of the computer.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-85

4.25 Fluorescent Lamp

4 Replacement Procedure

4

4.25 Fluorescent Lamp
This system uses LCD modules from the following suppliers. The procedure for replacing the
fluorescent lamp is different for each LCD module. Refer to the appropriate procedure.
Type

Part No.

Supplier

Section

14.1-inch (XGA)

VF2092P03

TOSHIBA

4.25.1

14.1-inch (SXGA+)

VF2074P01

Sharp

4.25.2

NOTE: - When working with an LCD module, always use a flat, grounded table.
- Handle the backlight unit in the environment without dust, such as on the clean
bench. Keep the worktable free from any screws or other material that may
scratch the LCD surface.
- Use an anti-static or protective sheet.
- When replacing the FL unit, cover with a finger protector or similar to prevent
soiling or scratching the LCD panel.
- Be careful when handling the lamp. Excessive force may break the lamp.
- Be careful not to soil or deform the lamp reflector.
- Make sure that the power of the LCD module is turned off before connecting
or disconnecting cables and connectors.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-85

4 Replacement Procedure

4.25 Fluorescent Lamp

4.25.1 Replacing the 14.1-inch XGA TOSHIBA Fluorescent Lamp
CAUTION: When replacing the fluorescent lamp, wear finger covers or gloves to avoid
contaminating or damaging the LCD panel. Be careful not to let dust or other foreign
substance into the module.
Disassembling the 14.1-inch XGA TOSHIBA Fluorescent Lamp
To disassemble the 14.1-inch XGA TOSHIBA fluorescent lamp, follow the steps below and refer
to figures 4-51 to 4-55.
1. Removing tapes and insulation sheets from LCD module
1) Place the LCD module face down on a flat table that has no alien substance on it.
Make sure there is no dust on the desk to avoid scratching the surface of the LCD
module. Place a protective sheet (such as soft cloth) on the surface.
2) Remove the fixing tape for the FL cable, two tapes at the side of lamp, X-PCB
insulation sheet and Y-PCB insulation sheet from the LCD module in order as shown
in the figure below.
NOTE: 1) Be careful not to give any damage to the TAB.
2) The X-PCB insulation sheet should be left attached to the bezel, as it
will be recycled.
3) The Y-PCB insulation sheet shall not be disposed after removed, as it
will be recycled.

4-86

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.25 Fluorescent Lamp

4 Replacement Procedure

(3) X-PCB insulation sheet

Product Label

Backlight Serial Number Label

Destruction Label
Caution Label

Fixing tape for
FL cable

(2) Bezel tape

(4) Y-PCB insulation sheet

Figure 4-51 Replacing TOSHIBA fluorescent lamp (XGA) (1)

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-87

4 Replacement Procedure

4.25 Fluorescent Lamp

2. Removing screws
1) Spread out the insulation sheet without detaching from the side of bezel.
2) Remove the screws (left side, right side) in order as shown in the figure below.
NOTE: Use a Philips screwdriver with type 0 bit to remove the screws.

Product Label

(1)

(2)

(1)
(2)

Backlight Serial Number Label

(2)
(1)
(2)

Destruction Label
Caution Label

(1)

Figure 4-512 Replacing TOSHIBA fluorescent lamp (XGA) (2)

4-88

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.25 Fluorescent Lamp

4 Replacement Procedure

3. Removing bezel
1) Turn the LCD module face up with the insulation sheets on it.
2) Release the latches of the bezel and frame. (five points on upper side, two points
lower side)
3) Remove the double-sided adhesive tape on the bottom of the side of bezel, and
remove the bezel.
NOTE: 1) Be careful not to damage the TAB when releasing the upper latches.
2) When removing the bezel, be sure to remove the double-sided
adhesive tapes on the lower side of bezel slowly so as not to break
the cell. Be careful not to deform the bezel.

Bezel

Backlight unit

Figure 4-53 Replacing TOSHIBA fluorescent lamp (XGA) (3)

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-89

4 Replacement Procedure

4-90

4.25 Fluorescent Lamp

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.25 Fluorescent Lamp

4 Replacement Procedure

4. Spreading out PCB
1) Spread out the X-PCB and Y-PCB horizontally in order.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the TAB.

(1) Spread out the XPCB from the back.

(2) Spread out the YPCB from the back.

Figure 4-54 Replacing TOSHIBA fluorescent lamp (XGA) (4)

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-91

4 Replacement Procedure

4.25 Fluorescent Lamp

5. Removing PCB-ASSY cell
1) Remove the PCB-ASSY cell from the backlight unit.
2) Remove the double-sided adhesive tape from the back of the cell.
NOTE: 1) Remove the tape slowly not to break the cell. The cell and frame are
glued by double-sided adhesive tape.
2) Be careful not to remove the light shielding tapes from the upper left
and right sides of the cell.

PCB-ASSY cell

Remove the cell by
peeling off the doublesided adhesive tape.

Backlight unit

Figure 4-55 Replacing TOSHIBA fluorescent lamp (XGA) (5)

4-92

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.25 Fluorescent Lamp

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4 Replacement Procedure

4-93

4 Replacement Procedure

4.25 Fluorescent Lamp

Assembling the 14.1-inch XGA TOSHIBA Fluorescent Lamp
To assemble the 15.0-inch XGA TOSHIBA fluorescent lamp, follow the steps below and refer to
figures 4-56 to 4-61.

1. Checking backlight
1) Check the following items shown in the figure below.

Fixing tape for sheet
Make sure the sheet does
not come off the frame.

Figure 4-56 Replacing TOSHIBA fluorescent lamp (XGA) (6)

4-94

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.25 Fluorescent Lamp

4 Replacement Procedure

2. Assembling PCB-ASSY cell
1) Remove the release paper of the double-sided tape at the upper of the backlight unit.
2) Light up the backlight.
3) Make sure there is no dust, alien substance or scratch on the backlight. Then make
sure there is nothing wrong with the back of cell, install the PCB-ASSY cell to the
backlight unit.
NOTE: 1) When installing the PCB-ASSY cell, fit it to the left bottom corner of
the backlight unit.
2) Be careful not to damage the TAB.

Cell with PCB

Remove the release
paper of the doublesided adhesive tape.

Backlight unit

Fit to the left
bottom corner.

Figure 4-57 Replacing TOSHIBA fluorescent lamp (XGA) (7)

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-95

4 Replacement Procedure

4.25 Fluorescent Lamp

3. Folding and temporary fixing of TAB/PCB
1) Fold the X-TAB (X-PCB) and Y-TAB (Y-PCB) to the back of backlight unit.
2) Hook the X-PCB on the three latches on the back of frame.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the TAB.

(1) Fold the X-PCB to the back.

(2) Fold the Y-PCB
to the back.
The PCB shall be hooked on the
three latches of the frame.

Insert the FPC into the connector.

The PCB shall not be
installed over the frame.

Figure 4-58 Replacing TOSHIBA fluorescent lamp (XGA) (8)

4-96

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.25 Fluorescent Lamp

4 Replacement Procedure

4. Setting bezel
1) Hook the bezel on the five latches of the frame from the upper side.
NOTE: 1) Make sure the GND-CU on the left side and lamp reflector shall be
inside the bezel.
2) Be careful not to damage the TAB.
3) Make sure the five latches of the upper side of bezel are hooked on.

(1) Install the bezel from the
TAB side. Be careful not to
damage the TAB. Hook the
bezel on the five latches.

Make sure the gum projection
for protecting the cable is not
outside th ebezel.

The cable shall not be
outside the bezel.
Make sure the fold of reflector
is not outside the bezel.

(2) Align the bezel with the
lamp side of the backlight unit.

Make sure the gum projection
for protecting the cable is not
outside th ebezel.

Figure 4-59 Replacing TOSHIBA fluorescent lamp (XGA) (9)

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-97

4 Replacement Procedure

4.25 Fluorescent Lamp

5. Fixing PCBs and bezel with screws
1) Tighten the left side with the screws in order shown in the figure below.
2) Tighten the right side with the screws in order shown in the figure below.
NOTE: 1) Tighten the screws in order. Make sure there is no floating of screw.
2) The screw tightening torque shall be 0.147mN•m (1.5kgf•cm).
3) Use a Philips screwdriver with type 0 bit.

(1)
Tighten the eight screws.

(2)
(3)
(4)

(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)

Figure 4-60 Replacing TOSHIBA fluorescent lamp (XGA) (10)

4-98

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.25 Fluorescent Lamp

4 Replacement Procedure

6. Sticking tapes and insulation sheets
1) Stick the Y-PCB insulation sheet and X-PCB insulation sheet in order.
2) Stick the two bezel tapes on the lower side (lamp side).
3) Stick the fixing tape for FL cable.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage to the TAB or the pulling-out part of lamp
cable when sticking the tapes and insulation sheets.
Stick the X-PCB
insulation sheet.

Stick the Y-PCB
insulation sheet.

Stick the insulation sheet
without any flexure.

Stick the insulation sheet
without any flexure.

Bezel tape

Stick the bezel tape while pressing
not to cause floating of bezel.

Standard for sticking bezel
tape. Stick the tape between
the mark-off lines.
Standard for fixing
tape for FL cable.

Fixing tape for FL cable
Standard for sticking bezel
tape. Stick the tape between
the mark-off lines.
Standard for sticking bezel
tape. Stick the tape between
the mark-off lines.

Figure 4-61 Replacing TOSHIBA fluorescent lamp (XGA) (11)

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-99

4 Replacement Procedure

4.25 Fluorescent Lamp

4.25.2 Replacing the 14.1-inch SXGA+ Sharp Fluorescent Lamp
CAUTION: When replacing the fluorescent lamp, wear finger covers or gloves to avoid
contaminating or damaging the LCD panel. Be careful not to let dust or other foreign
substance into the module.
Disassembling the 14.1-inch SXGA+ Sharp Fluorescent Lamp
To disassemble the 14.1-inch SXGA+ Sharp fluorescent lamp, follow the steps below and refer to
figures4-62 to 4-71.

1. Turn the LCD module face down, and remove the protection cover S (A), protection cover
G (B), aluminum tape (C) and fixing tape for lead wire (D).
NOTE: 1) Be careful not to damage the TCP or chips.
2) Discard the tapes removed.

4-100

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.25 Fluorescent Lamp

4 Replacement Procedure

(B) Protection cover G
(C) Aluminum tape

Latch

(D) Fixing tape
for lead wire

(A) Protection cover S

Figure 4-62 Replacing Sharp fluorescent lamp (SXGA+) (1)

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-101

4 Replacement Procedure

4.25 Fluorescent Lamp

2. Remove the four screws (E) on the sides.

(E)

Screw tightening torque:
0.1078N•m (1.1kgf •cm)

(E)

Figure 4-63 Replacing Sharp fluorescent lamp (SXGA+) (2)

4-102

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.25 Fluorescent Lamp

4 Replacement Procedure

3. Turn the LCD module face up and release the two latches on the side of lamp.

Latch

Figure 4-64 Replacing Sharp fluorescent lamp (SXGA+) (3)

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-103

4 Replacement Procedure

4.25 Fluorescent Lamp

4. Remove the bezel with having the U-shape side of bezel a supporting point, by lifting up the
bezel from the side of lamp.

U-shape side of bezel

Figure 4-65 Replacing Sharp fluorescent lamp (SXGA+) (4)

4-104

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.25 Fluorescent Lamp

4 Replacement Procedure

5. Turn the bezel face down, and remove the two screws (E) fixing the lamp cover (F) and
remove the lamp cover. Then replace the lamp unit (G) with a new one.

(E)

(F) Lamp cover
Screw tightening torque:
0.1078N• m (1.1kgf •cm)

(E)

(G) Lamp unit

Figure 4-66 Replacing Sharp fluorescent lamp (SXGA+) (5)

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-105

4 Replacement Procedure

4.25 Fluorescent Lamp

6. Install the lamp cover (F) and secure it with the two screws (E).
NOTE: Be careful not to make the lamp cover over the fitting pin. Around the
pulling-out part of the lead wire, attach so that the P chassis is outside.

(E)

Screw tightening torque:
0.1176N•m (1.2kgf •cm)
(F) Lamp cover

(E)

Figure 4-67 Replacing Sharp fluorescent lamp (SXGA+) (6)

4-106

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.25 Fluorescent Lamp

4 Replacement Procedure

7. Install the bezel. Make sure the bezel does not cover the guide rib. Hook the U-shape side
of bezel first, then engage the two latches at the side of lamp.

U-shape side of bezel

Latch

Figure 4-68 Replacing Sharp fluorescent lamp (SXGA+) (7)

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-107

4 Replacement Procedure

4.25 Fluorescent Lamp

8. Tighten the four screws (E) on the sides. Make sure the two latches are precisely mated.

Screw tightening torque:
0.1176N•m (1.2kgf•cm)
(E)

Latch

(E)

Figure 4-69 Replacing Sharp fluorescent lamp (SXGA+) (8)

4-108

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.25 Fluorescent Lamp

4 Replacement Procedure

9. Install the protection cover S (A), protection cover G (B), aluminum tape (C) and fixing
tape for lead wire (D). Use new parts.
•

Stick the protection covers in the order of (B), (A) to the standard line for fitting pin.

•

Stick the aluminum tape (C) following the sticking standards.
Long sides: Stick to the mark-off line of the lamp cover on the back of bezel.
Short sides: Stick to the edge of lamp cover.

•

Stick the fixing wire for lead wire following the sticking standards.
Long sides: Stick to the outline of the LCD module.
Short sides: Stick so that the wire covers the screws.

(B) Protection cover G
(C) Aluminum tape

Latch

(D) Fixing tape
for lead wire
(A) Protection cover S

Figure 4-70 Replacing Sharp fluorescent lamp (SXGA+) (9)

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-109

4 Replacement Procedure

4.25 Fluorescent Lamp

10. Perform appearance inspection after assembling the module.
Check mating

Check mating

Check screw

Check
sticking

Check sticking

Check there is
no scratch.

Check screw

Check there is
no deformation.

Check mating
Check sticking
Check screw
Check screw
Check mating

Check mating
Check sticking

Figure 4-71 Replacing Sharp fluorescent lamp (SXGA+) (10)

4-110

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4.25 Fluorescent Lamp

4 Replacement Procedure

Assembling the 14.1-inch SXGA+ Sharp Fluorescent Lamp
To assemble the 14.1-inch Sharp SXGA+ fluorescent lamp, follow the steps below and refer to
figures 4-62 to 4-71.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

4-111

Appendices

Appendices

App-ii

Appendices

Appendix

Contents

Appendix A Handling the LCD Module..............................................................................A-1
Appendix B Board Layout...................................................................................................B-1
B.1

System Board (FGFSY*) Front View...........................................................................1

B.2

System Board (FGFSY*) Back View ...........................................................................3

B.3

Sound Board (FGFSD*) Front and Back View ............................................................5

B.4

LED Board (FGFLE*) Front and Back View ...............................................................6

B.5

Sensor/Switch Board (FGFLS*) Front and Back View.................................................7

B.6

USB Board (FGFUS*) Front and Back View...............................................................8

Appendix C Pin Assignments...............................................................................................C-1
C.1

PJ1001 Memory 1 connector (200-pin) ................................................................. C-1

C.2

PJ1002 Memory 2 connector (200-pin) ................................................................. C-4

C.3

PJ1509 HDD interface connector (44-pin)............................................................. C-7

C.4

PJ1511 Select Bay interface connector (72-pin)..................................................... C-8

C.5

PJ1512 PC-Card interface connector (150-pin)..................................................... C-9

C.6

PJ1514 SD Card interface connector (12-pin) ..................................................... C-11

C.7

PJ123 Keyboard interface connector (34-pin)...................................................... C-11

C.8

PJ2003 PAD interface connector (8-pin) ............................................................. C-12

C.9

PJ1101 LED board interface connector (14-pin).................................................. C-12

C.10

PJ1000 Sensor/Switch board interface connector (10-pin) ................................... C-12

C.11

PJ2026 Speaker (Right) connector (3-pin)........................................................... C-12

C.12

PJ2027 Speaker (Left) connector (2-pin)............................................................. C-13

C.13

PJ2007 Docking connector (240-pin) .................................................................. C-14

C.14

PJ2015 Mini PCI interface connector (124-pin) ................................................... C-17

C.15

PJ2017 MDC 1 interface connector (30-pin)....................................................... C-19

C.16

PJ1003 MDC 2 interface connector (2-pin) ......................................................... C-19

C.17

PJ2019 Serial interface connector (9-pin)............................................................. C-19

C.18

PJ2020 Parallel interface connector (25-pin)........................................................ C-20

App-iii

Appendices

C.19

PJ2033 USB 0 interface connector (4-pin)........................................................... C-20

C.20

PJ2034 USB 1 interface connector (4-pin)........................................................... C-20

C.21

PJ1004 USB baord interface connector (6-pin).................................................... C-20

C.22

PJ4900 Bluetooth interface connector (20-pin)..................................................... C-21

C.23

PJ1100 Sound board interface connector (30-pin) ............................................... C-21

C.24

PJ651 IEEE1394 interface connector (4-pin)....................................................... C-22

C.25

PJ4500 LAN interface connector (14-pin) ........................................................... C-22

C.26

PJ8800 DC-IN connector (4-pin)........................................................................ C-22

C.27

PJ8810 1st Battery connector (10-pin) ................................................................ C-22

C.28

PJ1005 RTC Battery connector (2-pin) ............................................................... C-23

C.29

PJ8770 FAN interface connector (3-pin) ............................................................. C-23

C.30

PJ5500 LCD interface connector (41-pin) ........................................................... C-23

C.31

PJ5523 CRT interface connector (15-pin)............................................................ C-24

C.32

PJ5501 TV connector (4-pin) .............................................................................. C-24

C.33

PJ3000 System board interface connector (30-pin) .............................................. C-25

C.34

PJ3001 Internal Microphone connector (2-pin) .................................................... C-25

C.35

PJ3002 External Microphone connector (6-pin) ................................................... C-25

C.36

PJ3003 Headphone connector (6-pin) ................................................................. C-26

C.37

PJ3100 System board interface connector (14-pin) .............................................. C-27

C.38

PJ3200 System board interface connector (10-pin) .............................................. C-28

C.39

PJ3300 System board interface connector (6-pin)................................................ C-29

C.40

PJ3301 USB port 2 interface connector (4-pin) ................................................... C-29

Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes.................................................................. D-1
Appendix E Key Layout.......................................................................................................E-1
E.1

United Kingdom (UK) Keyboard .............................................................................E-1

E.2

United States (US) Keyboard...................................................................................E-1

Appendix F Wiring Diagrams .............................................................................................. F-1
F.1

App-iv

Parallel Port Wraparound Connector ........................................................................F-1

Appendices

F.2

Serial Port Wraparound Connector...........................................................................F-1

F.3

LAN Loopback Connector ......................................................................................F-2

Appendix G BIOS Rewrite Procedures ............................................................................. G-1
Appendix H EC/KBC Rewrite Procedures ........................................................................ H-1
Appendix I Reliability...........................................................................................................I-1

App-v

Appendices

Figures
Figure B-1 System board (FGFSY*) layout (front).....................................................................1
Figure B-2 System board (FGFSY*) layout (back) ....................................................................3
Figure B-3 Sound board (FGFSD*) layout (front/back)..............................................................5
Figure B-4 LED board (FGFLE*) layout (front/back).................................................................6
Figure B-5 Sensor/Switch board (FGFLS*) layout (front/back) ..................................................7
Figure B-6 USB board (FGFUS*) layout (front/back)................................................................8

Figure E-1 UK keyboard .......................................................................................................E-1
Figure E-2 US keyboard ........................................................................................................E-1

Figure F-1

Parallel port wraparound connector......................................................................F-1

Figure F-2 Serial port wraparound connector ........................................................................F-1
Figure F-3

App-vi

LAN loopback connector ....................................................................................F-2

Appendices

Tables
Table B-1 System board (FGFSY*) ICs and connectors (front) .................................................2
Table B-2 System board (FGFSY*) ICs and connectors (back).................................................4
Table B-3 Sound board (FGFSD*) ICs and connectors (front/back) ..........................................5
Table B-4 LED board (FGFLE*) connectors (front)...................................................................6
Table B-5 Sensor/Switch board (FGFLS*) ICs and connectors (front/back)...............................7
Table B-6 USB board (FGFUS*) connectors (back) .................................................................8

TableC-1 Memory 1 connector (200-pin) ............................................................................. C-1
TableC-2 Memory 2 connector (200-pin) ............................................................................. C-4
TableC-3 HDD interface connector (44-pin) ......................................................................... C-7
TableC-4 Select Bay interface connector (72-pin) ................................................................. C-8
TableC-5 PC-Card interface connector (150-pin) ................................................................. C-9
TableC-6 SD Card interface connector (12-pin).................................................................. C-11
TableC-7 Keyboard interface connector (34-pin)............................................................... C-11
TableC-8 PAD interface connector (8-pin).......................................................................... C-12
TableC-9 LED board interface connector (14-pin) .............................................................. C-12
TableC-10 Sensor/Switch board interface connector (10-pin) .............................................. C-12
TableC-11 Speaker (Right) connector (3-pin) ..................................................................... C-12
TableC-12 Speaker (Left) connector (2-pin)....................................................................... C-13
TableC-13 Docking interface connector (240-pin) ............................................................... C-14
TableC-14 Mini PCI interface connector (124-pin).............................................................. C-17
TableC-15 MDC 1 interface connector (30-pin).................................................................. C-19
TableC-16 MDC 2 interface connector (2-pin).................................................................... C-19
TableC-17 Serial interface connector (9-pin)....................................................................... C-19
TableC-18 Parallel interface connector (25-pin)................................................................... C-20
TableC-19 USB 0 interface connector (4-pin) ..................................................................... C-20
TableC-20 USB 1 interface connector (4-pin) ..................................................................... C-20

App-vii

Appendices

TableC-21 USB board interface connector (6-pin) .............................................................. C-20
TableC-22 Bluetooth interface connector (20-pin)............................................................... C-21
TableC-23 Sound board interface connector (30-pin).......................................................... C-21
TableC-24 IEEE1394 interface connector (4-pin)................................................................ C-22
TableC-25 LAN interface connector (14-pin)...................................................................... C-22
TableC-26 DC-IN interface connector (4-pin) .................................................................... C-22
TableC-27 1st Battery connector (10-pin)........................................................................... C-22
TableC-28 RTC Battery connector (2-pin).......................................................................... C-23
TableC-29 FAN interface connector (3in) ........................................................................... C-23
TableC-30 LCD interface connector (41-pin) ...................................................................... C-23
TableC-31 CRT interface connector (15-pin) ...................................................................... C-24
TableC-32 TV interface connector (4-pin)........................................................................... C-24
TableC-33 System board interface connector (30-pin)......................................................... C-25
TableC-34 Internal Microphone connector (2-pin)............................................................... C-25
TableC-35 External Microphone connector (6-pin).............................................................. C-25
TableC-36 Headphone connector (6-pin)............................................................................ C-26
TableC-37 System board interface connector (14-pin)......................................................... C-27
TableC-38 System board interface connector (10-pin)......................................................... C-28
TableC-39 System board interface connector (6-pin)........................................................... C-29
TableC-40 USB port 2 interface connector (4-pin) .............................................................. C-29

Table D-1 Scan codes (set 1 and set 2) ................................................................................. D-1
Table D-2 Scan codes with left Shift key................................................................................ D-5
Table D-3 Scan codes in Numlock mode ............................................................................... D-6
Table D-4 Scan codes with Fn key......................................................................................... D-6
Table D-5 Scan codes in overlay mode .................................................................................. D-7
Table D-6 No.124 key scan code.......................................................................................... D-7
Table D-7 No.126 key scan code.......................................................................................... D-8

Table I-1

App-viii

MTBF ..............................................................................................................I-1

Appendix A Handling the LCD Module
Appendix A

Appendices

P

Appendix A

Handling the LCD Module

Precautions for handling the LCD module
The LCD module can be easily damaged during assembly or disassembly. Observe the following
precautions when handling the LCD module:

1. When installing the LCD module in the LCD cover, be sure to seat it so that it is properly
aligned and maximum visibility of the display is maintained.

2. For 14.4 inch LCD module, be careful to align the four holes at the right side and left side of
the LCD module with the corresponding holes in the LCD cover before securing the module
with four screws.
Do not force the module into place, because stress can affect its performance.
Also, the panel’s polarized surface is easily scarred, so be carefully when handling it.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

A-1

Appendices

Appendix A Handling the LCD Module

3. If the panel’s surface gets dirty, wipe it with cotton or a soft cloth. If it is still dirty, try
breathing on the surface to create a light condensate and wipe it again.
If the surface is very dirty, we recommend a CRT cleaning agent. Apply the agent to a cloth
and then wipe the panel’s surface. Do not apply cleanser directly to the panel.

4. If water or other liquid is left on the panel’s surface for a long period, it can change the
screen’s tint or stain it. Be sure to quickly wipe off any liquid.

A-2

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

Appendix A Handling the LCD Module

Appendices

5. Glass is used in the panel, so be careful not to drop it or let it strike a hard object, which
could cause breakage or cracks.

6. CMOS-LSI circuits are used in the module, so guard against damage from electrostatic
discharge. Be sure to wear a wrist or ankle ground when handling the module.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

A-3

Appendices

Appendix A Handling the LCD Module

7. Do not expose the module to direct sunlight or strong ultraviolet rays for long periods.

8. Do not store the module at temperatures below specifications. Cold can cause the liquid
crystals to freeze, lose their elasticity or otherwise suffer damage.

A-4

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

Appendix A Handling the LCD Module

Appendices

9. Do not disassemble the LCD module. Disassembly can cause malfunctions.

10. If you transport the module, do not use packing material that contains epoxy resin (amine)
or silicon glue (alcohol or oxime). These materials can release gas that can damage the
panel’s polarization.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

A-5

Appendices

A-6

Appendix A Handling the LCD Module

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

Appendix B Board Layout

Appendix B
B.1

Appendices

Board Layout

System Board (FGFSY*) Front View

(ZA)

(A)
(Z)

(B)
(C)

(Y)
(X)
(W)

(D)

(E)
(F)

(G)
(H)
(V)

(I)

(U)
(T)
(S)

(J)

(R)
(K)
(Q)
(P)

(L)

(O)

(M)

(N)

Figure B-1 System board (FGFSY*) layout (front)

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

B-1

Appendices

Appendix B Board Layout

Table B-1 System board (F GFSY*) ICs and connectors (front)

B-2

Mark

Number

Name

(A)

PJ4900

Bluetooth interface connector

(B)

PJ1005

RTC Battery connector

(C)

PJ1101

LED board connector

(D)

IC2000

EC/KBC

(E)

PJ123

Keyboard interface connector

(F)

PJ2003

Dual Point interface connector

(G)

PJ1004

USB 2 interface connector

(H)

IC1500

ICH4-M

(I)

PJ2035

SC board interface connector

(J)

PJ2015

Mini PCI interface connector

(K)

PJ1100

Sound board interface connector

(L)

IC1508

YEBISU3S

(M)

PJ1514

SD card interface connector

(N)

PJ8770

FAN interface connector

(O)

PJ1002

Memory 2 connector

(P)

PJ2027

Speaker (Left) connector

(Q)

PJ2026

Speaker (Right) connector

(R)

IC141

(S)

IC9

(T)

PJ1001

(U)

IC142

1394 EEPROM

(V)

IC1008

LAN controller

(W)

PJ5500

LCD interface connector

(X)

PJ1000

Light Sensor board connector

(Y)

IC2017

SUPER I/O

(Z)

IC5502

XP4

(ZA)

PJ8800

DC-IN

1394 PHY/LINK
CK408
Memory 1 connector

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

Appendix B Board Layout

B.2

Appendices

System Board (FGFSY*) Back View

(A)

(B)

(T)
(C)
(S)

(D)

(R)

(E)

(Q)

(F)

(P)

(G)

(O)

(H)

(N)
(I)
(M)
(L)

(K)

(J)

Figure B-2 System board (FGFSY*) layout (back)

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

B-3

Appendices

Appendix B Board Layout

Table B-2 System board (F GFSY*) ICs and connectors (back)

B-4

Mark

Number

Name

(A)

PJ5501

TV controller connector

(B)

PJ5523

CRT interface connector

(C)

PJ2019

Serial interface connector

(D)

PJ2007

Docking interface connector

(E)

PJ2020

Parallel interface connector

(F)

IS1000

CPU

(G)

PJ1003

Modem 2 interface connector

(H)

PJ4500

LAN interface connector

(I)

PJ651

IEEE1394 interface connector

(J)

PJ2033

USB 0 interface connector

(K)

PJ2034

USB 1 interface connector

(L)

IC6003

AN12940

(M)

IC6000

AD1981B

(N)

PJ1512

PC-card interface connector

(O)

IC1101

FWH

(P)

PJ2017

Modem 1 interface connector

(Q)

PJ1509

HDD interface connector

(R)

PJ8810

1st Battery connenctor

(S)

IC1001

MCH-M

(T)

PJ1511

Select Bay interface connector

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

Appendix B Board Layout

B.3

Appendices

Sound Board (F GFSD*) Front and Back View
(A)

(front)
(C) (F)

(B)

(E)

(D)

(back)
Figure B-3 Sound board (FGFSD*) layout (front/back )

Table B-3 Sound board (FGFSD*) ICs and connectors (front/back)
Mark

Number

(A)

PJ3001

Internal Microphone connector

(B)

PJ3002

External Microphone connector

(C)

PJ3003

Headphone connector

(D)

PJ3000

System board interface connector

(E)

IC3000

FIR

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

Name

B-5

Appendices

(F)

B-6

Appendix B Board Layout

VR3000

Volume

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

Appendix B Board Layout

B.4

Appendices

LED Board (FGFLE*) Front and Back View
(B)

(C)

(D)

(E)

(F)

(G)

(A)

(front)

(back)
Figure B-4 LED board (FGFLE*) layout (front/back)

Table B-4 LED board (FGFLE*) connector (front)
Mark

Number

(A)

PJ3100

(B)

DS3100/3101

DC IN LED

(C)

DS3102/3103

Power On LED

(D)

DS3104/3105

Main battery LED

(E)

DS3106

(F)

DS3107/3108

(G)

DS3109

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

Name
System board interface connector

HDD LED
Select Bay LED
Bluetooth/Wireless LAN LED

B-7

Appendices

Appendix B Board Layout

B.5 Sensor/Switch Board (FGFLS*) Front and Back View

(B)

(A)

(D)

(C)

(front)

(E)

(back)

Figure B-5 Sensor/Switch board (FGFLS*) layout (front/back )

Table B-5 Sensor/Switch board (FGFLS*) ICs and connectors (front)

B-8

Mark

Number

Name

(A)

PJ3200

System board interface connector

(B)

S3200

LCD open/close sensor

(C)

S3201

In touch button

(D)

S3202

Presentation button

(E)

IC3200

Light sensor

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

Appendix B Board Layout

B.6

Appendices

USB Board (FGFUS*) Front and Back View

(B)

(A)

(front)

(back)

Figure B-6 USB board (FGFUS*) layout (front/back)

Table B-6 USB board (FGFUS*) connectors (back)

Mark

Number

(A)

PJ3300

System board interface connector

(B)

PJ3301

USB port 3 connector

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

Name

B-9

Apx.C Pin Assignments

Appendices

Appendix C

Appendix C

Pin Assignments

System Board
C.1

PJ1001 Memory 1 connector (200-pin)
Table C-1 Memory 1 connector (200-pin) (1/3)
Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

1

MR1R25-P1V

-

2

MR1R25-P1V

-

3

GND

-

4

GND

-

5

SDQ04R-B2P

I/O

6

SDQ01R-B2P

I/O

7

SDQ00R-B2P

I/O

8

SDQ03R-B2P

I/O

9

2R5-B2V

-

10

2R5-B2V

-

11

SDQS0R-B2P

I/O

12

GND

-

13

SDQ06R-B2P

I/O

14

SDQ02R-B2P

15

GND

-

16

GND

17

SDQ05R-B2P

I/O

18

SDQ07R-B2P

I/O

19

SDQ13R-B2P

I/O

20

SDQ14R-B2P

I/O

21

2R5-B2V

-

22

2R5-B2V

23

SDQ08R-B2P

I/O

24

SDQ15R-B2P

25

SDQS1R-B2P

I/O

26

GND

-

27

GND

-

28

GND

-

29

SDQ09R-B2P

I/O

30

SDQ11R-B2P

I/O

31

SDQ12R-B2P

I/O

32

SDQ10R-B2P

I/O

33

2R5-B2V

-

34

2R5-B2V

-

35

SCK0-B2P

I

36

2R5-B2V

-

37

SCK0-B2N

I

38

GND

-

39

GND

-

40

GND

-

41

SDQ22R-B2P

I/O

42

SDQ16R-B2P

I/O

43

SDQ18R-B2P

I/O

44

SDQ20R-B2P

I/O

45

2R5-B2V

-

46

2R5-B2V

-

47

SDQS2R-B2P

I/O

48

GND

-

49

SDQ23R-B2P

I/O

50

SDQ17R-B2P

51

GND

-

52

GND

53

SDQ19R-B2P

I/O

54

SDQ21R-B2P

I/O

55

SDQ27R-B2P

I/O

56

SDQ24R-B2P

I/O

57

2R5-B2V

-

58

2R5-B2V

59

SDQ26R-B2P

I/O

60

SDQ25R-B2P

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

I/O
-

I/O

I/O
-

I/O

C-1

Appendices

61

Apx.C Pin Assignments

SDQS3R-B2P

I/O

62

GND

-

Table C-1 Memory 1 connector (200pin) (2/3)
Pin No.

C-2

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

-

64

GND

I/O

63

GND

-

65

SDQ30R-B2P

I/O

66

SDQ29R-B2P

I/O

67

SDQ31R-B2P

I/O

68

SDQ28R-B2P

I/O

69

2R5-B2V

-

70

2R5-B2V

71

SCB5A -B2P

I/O

72

SCB0A-B2P

I/O

73

SCB4A -B2P

I/O

74

SCB1A-B2P

I/O

75

GND

-

76

GND

-

77

SDQS8A-B2P

I/O

78

GND

-

79

SCB2A -B2P

I/O

80

SCB3A-B2P

81

2R5-B2V

-

82

2R5-B2V

83

SCB6A -B2P

I/O

84

SCB7A-B2P

85

NC

-

86

NC

-

87

GND

-

88

GND

-

89

2R5-B2V

-

90

GND

-

91

GND

-

92

2R5-B2V

-

93

2R5-B2V

-

94

2R5-B2V

-

95

SCKE1-B2P

I

96

SCKE0-B2P

I

97

NC

-

98

NC

-

99

SMA12R-B2P

I

100

SMA11R-B2P

I

101

SMA09R-B2P

I

102

SMA08R-B2P

I

103

GND

-

104

GND

-

105

SMA07R-B2P

I

106

SMA06R-B2P

I

107

SMA05R-B2P

I

108

SMA04R-B2P

I

109

SMA03R-B2P

I

110

SMA02R-B2P

I

111

SMA01R-B2P

I

112

SMA00R-B2P

I

113

2R5-B2V

-

114

2R5-B2V

-

115

SMA10R-B2P

I

116

SBS1R-B2P

I

117

SBS0R-B2P

I

118

SRASR-B2N

I

119

SWER-B2N

I

120

SCASR-B2N

I

121

SCS0-B2N

I

122

SCS1-B2N

I

123

NC

-

124

NC

-

125

GND

-

126

GND

-

127

SDQ38R-B2P

I/O

128

SDQ36R-B2P

I/O

129

SDQ34R-B2P

I/O

130

SDQ37R-B2P

I/O

131

2R5-B2V

-

132

2R5-B2V

-

I/O
I/O

-

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

Appendix C Pin Assignments

Appendices

133

SDQS4R-B2P

I/O

134

GND

135

SDQ39R-B2P

I/O

136

SDQ33R-B2P

137

GND

-

138

GND

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

I/O
-

C-3

Appendices

Apx.C Pin Assignments

Table C-1 Memory 1 connector (200-pin) (3/3)
Pin No.

C-4

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

139

SDQ35R-B2P

I/O

140

SDQ32R-B2P

I/O

141

SDQ45R-B2P

I/O

142

SDQ46R-B2P

I/O

143

2R5-B2V

-

144

2R5-B2V

145

SDQ44R-B2P

I/O

146

SDQ42R-B2P

147

SDQS5R-B2P

I/O

148

GND

-

149

GND

-

150

GND

-

151

SDQ41R-B2P

I/O

152

SDQ43R-B2P

I/O

153

SDQ40R-B2P

I/O

154

SDQ47R-B2P

I/O

155

2R5-B2V

-

156

2R5-B2V

-

157

2R5-B2V

-

158

SCK1-B2N

I

159

GND

-

160

SCK1-B2P

I

161

GND

-

162

GND

-

163

SDQ48R-B2P

I/O

164

SDQ51R-B2P

I/O

165

SDQ53R-B2P

I/O

166

SDQ52R-B2P

I/O

167

2R5-B2V

-

168

2R5-B2V

-

169

SDQS6R-B2P

I/O

170

GND

-

171

SDQ49R-B2P

I/O

172

SDQ55R-B2P

173

GND

-

174

GND

175

SDQ54R-B2P

I/O

176

SDQ50R-B2P

I/O

177

SDQ60R-B2P

I/O

178

SDQ62R-B2P

I/O

179

2R5-B2V

-

180

2R5-B2V

181

SDQ56R-B2P

I/O

182

SDQ63R-B2P

183

SDQS7R-B2P

I/O

184

GND

-

185

GND

-

186

GND

-

187

SDQ57R-B2P

I/O

188

SDQ59R-B2P

I/O

189

SDQ61R-B2P

I/O

190

SDQ58R-B2P

I/O

191

2R5-B2V

-

192

2R5-B2V

-

193

SMBDAT-P3P

I/O

194

GND

-

195

SMBCLK-P3P

I

196

GND

-

197

P3V

-

198

GND

-

199

NC

-

200

NC

-

I/O

I/O
-

I/O

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

Appendix C Pin Assignments

C.2

Appendices

PJ1002 Memory 2 connector (200-pin)
Table C-2 Memory 2 connector (200-pin) (1/3)
Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

1

MR1R25-P1V

-

2

MR1R25-P1V

-

3

GND

-

4

GND

-

5

SDQ04R-B2P

I/O

6

SDQ01R-B2P

I/O

7

SDQ00R-B2P

I/O

8

SDQ03R-B2P

I/O

9

2R5-B2V

-

10

2R5-B2V

-

11

SDQS0R-B2P

I/O

12

GND

-

13

SDQ06R-B2P

I/O

14

SDQ02R-B2P

15

GND

-

16

GND

17

SDQ05R-B2P

I/O

18

SDQ07R-B2P

I/O

19

SDQ13R-B2P

I/O

20

SDQ14R-B2P

I/O

21

2R5-B2V

-

22

2R5-B2V

23

SDQ08R-B2P

I/O

24

SDQ15R-B2P

25

SDQS1R-B2P

I/O

26

GND

-

27

GND

-

28

GND

-

29

SDQ09R-B2P

I/O

30

SDQ11R-B2P

I/O

31

SDQ12R-B2P

I/O

32

SDQ10R-B2P

I/O

33

2R5-B2V

-

34

2R5-B2V

-

35

SCK3-B2P

I

36

2R5-B2V

-

37

SCK3-B2N

I

38

GND

-

39

GND

-

40

GND

-

41

SDQ22R-B2P

I/O

42

SDQ16R-B2P

I/O

43

SDQ18R-B2P

I/O

44

SDQ20R-B2P

I/O

45

2R5-B2V

-

46

2R5-B2V

-

47

SDQS2R-B2P

I/O

48

GND

-

49

SDQ23R-B2P

I/O

50

SDQ17R-B2P

51

GND

-

52

GND

53

SDQ19R-B2P

I/O

54

SDQ21R-B2P

I/O

55

SDQ27R-B2P

I/O

56

SDQ24R-B2P

I/O

57

2R5-B2V

-

58

2R5-B2V

59

SDQ26R-B2P

I/O

60

SDQ25R-B2P

61

SDQS3R-B2P

I/O

62

GND

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

I/O
-

I/O

I/O
-

I/O
-

C-5

Appendices

Apx.C Pin Assignments

Table C-2 Memory 2 connector (200-pin) (2/3)
Pin No.

C-6

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

-

64

GND

I/O

63

GND

-

65

SDQ30R-B2P

I/O

66

SDQ29R-B2P

I/O

67

SDQ31R-B2P

I/O

68

SDQ28R-B2P

I/O

69

2R5-B2V

-

70

2R5-B2V

71

SCB5B -B2P

I/O

72

SCB0B-B2P

I/O

73

SCB4B -B2P

I/O

74

SCB1B-B2P

I/O

75

GND

-

76

GND

-

77

SDQS8B-B2P

I/O

78

GND

-

79

SCB2B -B2P

I/O

80

SCB3B-B2P

81

2R5-B2V

-

82

2R5-B2V

83

SCB6B -B2P

I/O

84

SCB7B-B2P

85

NC

-

86

NC

-

87

GND

-

88

GND

-

89

2R5-B2V

-

90

GND

-

91

GND

-

92

2R5-B2V

-

93

2R5-B2V

-

94

2R5-B2V

-

95

SCKE3-B2P

I

96

SCKE2-B2P

I

97

NC

-

98

NC

-

99

SMA12-B2P

I

100

SMA11-B2P

I

101

SMA09-B2P

I

102

SMA08-B2P

I

103

GND

-

104

GND

-

105

SMA07-B2P

I

106

SMA06-B2P

I

107

SMA05-B2P

I

108

SMA04-B2P

I

109

SMA03-B2P

I

110

SMA02-B2P

I

111

SMA01-B2P

I

112

SMA00-B2P

I

113

2R5-B2V

-

114

2R5-B2V

-

115

SMA10-B2P

I

116

SBS1-B2P

I

117

SBS0-B2P

I

118

SRAS-B2N

I

119

SWE-B2N

I

120

SCAS-B2N

I

121

SCS2-B2N

I

122

SCS3-B2N

I

123

NC

-

124

NC

-

125

GND

-

126

GND

-

127

SDQ38R-B2P

I/O

128

SDQ36R-B2P

I/O

129

SDQ34R-B2P

I/O

130

SDQ37R-B2P

I/O

131

2R5-B2V

-

132

2R5-B2V

-

133

SDQS4R-B2P

I/O

134

GND

-

-

I/O
I/O

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

Appendix C Pin Assignments

135

SDQ39R-B2P

137

GND

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

Appendices

I/O

136

SDQ33R-B2P

-

138

GND

I/O
-

C-7

Appendices

Apx.C Pin Assignments

Table C-2 Memory 2 connector (200-pin) (3/3)
Pin No.

C-8

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

139

SDQ35R-B2P

I/O

140

SDQ32R-B2P

I/O

141

SDQ45R-B2P

I/O

142

SDQ46R-B2P

I/O

143

2R5-B2V

-

144

2R5-B2V

145

SDQ44R-B2P

I/O

146

SDQ42R-B2P

147

SDQS5R-B2P

I/O

148

GND

-

149

GND

-

150

GND

-

151

SDQ41R-B2P

I/O

152

SDQ43R-B2P

I/O

153

SDQ40R-B2P

I/O

154

SDQ47R-B2P

I/O

155

2R5-B2V

-

156

2R5-B2V

-

157

2R5-B2V

-

158

SCK4-B2N

I

159

GND

-

160

SCK4-B2P

I

161

GND

-

162

GND

-

163

SDQ48R-B2P

I/O

164

SDQ51R-B2P

I/O

165

SDQ53R-B2P

I/O

166

SDQ52R-B2P

I/O

167

2R5-B2V

-

168

2R5-B2V

-

169

SDQS6R-B2P

I/O

170

GND

-

171

SDQ49R-B2P

I/O

172

SDQ55R-B2P

173

GND

-

174

GND

175

SDQ54R-B2P

I/O

176

SDQ50R-B2P

I/O

177

SDQ60R-B2P

I/O

178

SDQ62R-B2P

I/O

179

2R5-B2V

-

180

2R5-B2V

181

SDQ56R-B2P

I/O

182

SDQ63R-B2P

183

SDQS7R-B2P

I/O

184

GND

-

185

GND

-

186

GND

-

187

SDQ57R-B2P

I/O

188

SDQ59R-B2P

I/O

189

SDQ61R-B2P

I/O

190

SDQ58R-B2P

I/O

191

2R5-B2V

-

192

2R5-B2V

-

193

SMBDAT-P3P

I/O

194

P3V

-

195

SMBCLK-P3P

I

196

GND

-

197

P3V

-

198

GND

-

199

NC

-

200

NC

-

I/O

I/O
-

I/O

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

Appendix C Pin Assignments

C.3

Appendices

PJ1509 HDD interface connector (44-pin)
Table C-3 HDD interface connector (44-pin)
Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

1

NC

-

2

GND

-

3

P5V

-

4

P5V

-

5

GND

-

6

HDDLED-P5P

7

PDCS3-P3N

O

8

PDCS1-P3N

9

PDA2-P3P

I

10

PDA0-P3P

11

NC

-

12

PDA1-P3P

I

13

NC

-

14

IRQ14-P3P

O

15

GND

-

16

PDDACK-P3N

O

17

NC

-

18

PIORDY-P3P

O

19

GND

-

20

PDIOR-P3N

O

21

GND

-

22

PDIOW-P3N

O

23

GND

-

24

PDDREQ-P3P

O

25

NC

-

26

GND

-

27

PDD15-P3P

I/O

28

PDD00-P3P

I/O

29

PDD14-P3P

I/O

30

PDD01-P3P

I/O

31

PDD13-P3P

I/O

32

PDD02-P3P

I/O

33

PDD12-P3P

I/O

34

PDD03-P3P

I/O

35

PDD11-P3P

I/O

36

PDD04-P3P

I/O

37

PDD10-P3P

I/O

38

PDD05-P3P

I/O

39

PDD09-P3P

I/O

40

PDD06-P3P

I/O

41

PDD08-P3P

I/O

42

PDD07-P3P

I/O

43

GND

-

44

IDRSTA-P5N

I

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

I
O
I

C-9

Appendices

C.4

Apx.C Pin Assignments

PJ1511 Select Bay interface connector (72-pin)
Table C-4 Select Bay interface connector (72-pin)
Pin No.

C-10

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

1

GND

-

2

GND

-

3

CDAUDR-PXP

O

4

CDAUDL-PXP

O

5

GND

-

6

CD-GND

-

7

IDRSTB-P5N

O

8

GND

-

9

GND

-

10

SDD07-P3P

I/O

11

SDD08-P3P

I/O

12

SDD06-P3P

I/O

13

SDD09-P3P

I/O

14

SDD05-P3P

I/O

15

SDD10-P3P

I/O

16

GND

17

GND

-

18

SDD04-P3P

I/O

19

SDD11-P3P

I/O

20

SDD03-P3P

I/O

21

SDD12-P3P

I/O

22

SDD02-P3P

I/O

23

SDD13-P3P

I/O

24

SB-P5V

25

SB-P5V

-

26

SDD01-P3P

I/O

27

SDD14-P3P

I/O

28

SDD00-P3P

I/O

29

SDD15-P3P

I/O

30

GND

-

31

GND

-

32

SDDREQ-P3P

O

33

GND

-

34

SDIOW-P3N

O

35

GND

-

36

SDIOR-P3N

O

37

GND

-

38

SIORDY-P3P

O

39

NC

-

40

SDDACK -P3N

O

41

GND

-

42

IRQ15-P5P

O

43

NC

-

44

SDA1-P3P

I

45

SB-P5V

-

46

SB-P5V

-

47

SB-P5V

-

48

SDA0-P3P

I

49

SDA2-P3P

I

50

SDCS1-P3N

O

51

SDCS3-P3N

O

52

CDRLED-P5N

O

53

GND

-

54

MBSTS2-S3N

O

55

MBSTS1-S3N

O

56

MBSTS0-S3N

O

57

GND

-

58

DBT20V-S3N

O

59

PSDA-S5P

O

60

BT2VD

61

PSCL-S5P

O

62

BTMP2-SXP

O

63

CDCHG2-S5P

I

64

GND

-

65

GND

-

66

NC

-

67

GND

-

68

NC

-

-

-

I

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

Appendix C Pin Assignments

Appendices

69

GND

-

70

GND

-

71

GND

-

72

PVBAT2

I

C.5

PJ1512 PC-Card interface connector (150-pin)
Table C-5 PC-Card interface connector (150-pin) (1/2)
Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

1

GND

-

2

GND

-

3

BCCD1-B3N

I

4

BCAD00-BYP

I/O

5

BCAD02-BYP

I/O

6

BCAD01-BYP

I/O

7

BCAD04-BYP

I/O

8

BCAD03-BYP

I/O

9

GND

-

10

BCAD06-BYP

I/O

11

BCAD05-BYP

I/O

12

BCD14-BYP

I/O

13

BCAD07-BYP

I/O

14

BCAD08-BYP

I/O

15

BCCBE0-BYN

I/O

16

BCAD10-BYP

I/O

17

GND

-

18

BCAD09-BYP

I/O

19

BCVS1-B3P

I/O

20

BCAD11-BYP

I/O

21

BCAD13-BYP

I/O

22

BCAD12-BYP

I/O

23

BCAD15-BYP

I/O

24

BCAD14-BYP

I/O

25

GND

-

26

BCAD16-BYP

I/O

27

BCCBE1-BYN

I/O

28

BCA18-BYP

I/O

29

BCPAR-BYP

I/O

30

BCLOCK-BYN

I/O

31

BCPERR-BYN

I/O

32

BCSTOP-BYN

I/O

33

GND

-

34

BCGNT-BYN

35

BCDEVS-BYN

I/O

36

BCINT-BYN

O

37

MCVCCB-BYV

-

38

MCVCCB-BYV

-

39

MCVPPB-BYV

-

40

BCCLK-BYP

I/O

41

BCTRDY -BYN

I/O

42

BCIRDY-BYN

I/O

43

GND

-

44

BCFRAM-BYN

I/O

45

BCCBE2-BYN

I/O

46

BCAD17-BYP

I/O

47

BCAD18-BYP

I/O

48

BCAD19-BYP

I/O

49

BCAD20-BYP

I/O

50

BCVS2-B3P

I/O

51

GND

-

52

BCAD21-BYP

I/O

53

BCRST-BYN

I/O

54

BCAD22-BYP

I/O

55

BCSERR-BYN

I/O

56

BCAD23-BYP

I/O

57

BCREQ-BYN

O

58

BCAD24-BYP

I/O

59

GND

-

60

BCCBE3-BYN

I/O

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

I

C-11

Appendices

C-12

Apx.C Pin Assignments

61

BCAD25-BYP

I/O

62

BCAUDI-BYP

O

63

BCAD26-BYP

I/O

64

BCSTSC-BYP

O

65

BCAD27-BYP

I/O

66

BCAD28-BYP

I/O

67

GND

-

68

BCAD29-BYP

I/O

69

BCAD30-BYP

I/O

70

BCD02-BYP

I/O

71

BCAD31-BYP

I/O

72

BCCLKR-BYN

I/O

73

BCCD2-B3N

O

74

GND

-

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

Appendix C Pin Assignments

Appendices

Table C-5 PC-Card interface connector (150-pin) (2/2)
Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

75

GND

-

76

GND

-

77

GND

-

78

ACCD1-B3N

O

79

ACAD00-BYP

I/O

80

ACAD02-BYP

I/O

81

ACAD01-BYP

I/O

82

ACAD04-BYP

I/O

83

ACAD03-BYP

I/O

84

GND

85

ACAD06-BYP

I/O

86

ACAD05-BYP

I/O

87

ACD14-BYP

I/O

88

ACAD07-BYP

I/O

89

ACAD08-BYP

I/O

90

ACCBE0-BYN

I/O

91

ACAD10-BYP

I/O

92

GND

93

ACAD09-BYP

I/O

94

ACVS1-B3P

I/O

95

ACAD11-BYP

I/O

96

ACAD13-BYP

I/O

97

ACAD12-BYP

I/O

98

ACAD15-BYP

I/O

99

ACAD14-BYP

I/O

100

GND

101

ACAD16-BYP

I/O

102

ACCBE1-BYN

I/O

103

ACA18-BYP

I/O

104

ACPAR-BYP

I/O

105

ACLOCK -BYN

I/O

106

ACPERR-BYN

I/O

107

ACSTOP-BYN

I/O

108

GND

109

ACGNT-BYN

I

110

ACDEVS-BYN

I/O

111

ACINT-BYN

O

112

MCVCCA-BYV

-

113

MCVCCA-BYV

-

114

MCVPPA-BYV

-

115

ACCLK-BYP

I/O

116

ACTRDY-BYN

I/O

117

ACIRDY -BYN

I/O

118

GND

119

ACFRAM-BYN

I/O

120

ACCBE2-BYN

I/O

121

ACAD17-BYP

I/O

122

ACAD18-BYP

I/O

123

ACAD19-BYP

I/O

124

ACAD20-BYP

I/O

125

ACVS2-B3P

I/O

126

GND

127

ACAD21-BYP

I/O

128

ACRST-BYN

I/O

129

ACAD22-BYP

I/O

130

ACSERR-BYN

I/O

131

ACAD23-BYP

I/O

132

ACREQ-BYN

O

133

ACAD24-BYP

I/O

134

GND

-

135

ACCBE3-BYN

I/O

136

ACAD25-BYP

I/O

137

ACAUDI-BYP

O

138

ACAD26-BYP

I/O

139

ACSTSC-BYP

O

140

ACAD27-BYP

I/O

141

ACAD28-BYP

I/O

142

GND

143

ACAD29-BYP

I/O

144

ACAD30-BYP

I/O

145

ACD02-BYP

I/O

146

ACAD31-BYP

I/O

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

C-13

Appendices

Apx.C Pin Assignments

147

ACCLKR-BYN

149

GND

C.6

I/O

148

ACCD2-B3N

O

-

150

GND

-

PJ1514 SD Card interface connector (12-pin)
Table C-6 SD Card interface connector (12-pin)
Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

2

SDCMD-B3P

I/O
I/O

1

SDAT3 -B3P

3

GND

-

4

SD-P3V

-

5

SDCLK -B3P

I

6

GND

-

7

SDAT0 -B3P

I/O

8

SDAT1-B3P

I/O

9

SDAT2 -B3P

I/O

10

SDCD-B3N

O

11

SDWP-B3P

O

12

GND

-

C.7

PJ123 Keyboard interface connector (34-pin)
Table C-7 Keyboard interface connector (34-pin)
Pin No.

C-14

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

1

NUMLED-P5N

O

2

ARWLED-P5N

O

3

CAPLED-P5N

O

4

P5V

-

5

KBSC00-S3N

O

6

KBSC01-S3N

O

7

KBSC02-S3N

O

8

KBSC03-S3N

O

9

KBSC04-S3N

O

10

KBSC05-S3N

O

11

KBSC06-S3N

O

12

KBRT00-S3N

I

13

KBSC07-S3N

O

14

KBSC08-S3N

O

15

KBSC09-S3N

O

16

KBRT01-S3N

I

17

KBRT02-S3N

I

18

KBRT03-S3N

I

19

KBSC10-S3N

O

20

KBSC11-S3N

O

21

KBRT04-S3N

I

22

KBRT05-S3N

I

23

KBSC12-S3N

O

24

KBSC13-S3N

O

25

KBRT06-S3N

I

26

KBRT07-S3N

I

27

KBSC14-S3N

O

28

KBSC15-S3N

O

29

NC

-

30

SP-P5V

-

31

SPX-PXP

I

32

SP-GND

-

33

SPY-PXP

I

34

NC

-

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

Appendix C Pin Assignments

C.8

Appendices

PJ2003 PAD interface connector (8-pin)
Table C-8 PAD interface connector (8-pin)
Pin No.

Signal Name

1

P5V

3

IPDCLK -P5P

5
7

C.9

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

-

2

IPDDAT-P5P

I/O

4

GND

I/O
-

SP-GND

-

6

SPY-PXP

O

SPX-PXP

O

8

SP-P5V

-

PJ1101 LED board interface connector (14-pin)
Table C-9 LED board interface connector (14-pin)
Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

1

E5V

-

2

PWLEOR-S3P

I

3

PWLEGR-S3P

I

4

M5V

-

5

DCINOR-S5N

I

6

DCINGR-S5N

I

7

BAT1OR-S5N

I

8

BAT1GR-S5N

I

9

BAT2OR-S5N

I

10

BAT2GR-S5N

I

11

P5V

-

12

HDDLED-P5P

O

13

BTLED-S3P

I

14

GND

-

C.10
pin)

PJ1000 Sensor/Switch board interface connector (10Table C-10 Sensor/Switch board interface connector (10-pin)
Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O
-

Pin No.
2
4

ILUOUT-PXP
PNLOFF-S3N

I/O
O
O

KBSC16-S3N

I

6

KBRT00-S3N

O

7

KBRT03-S3N

O

8

NC

-

9

NC

-

10

GND

-

1
3

P3V
NC

5

C.11

Signal Name

PJ2026 Speaker (Right) connector (3-pin)
Table C-11 Speaker (Right) connector (3-pin)
Pin No.
1

Signal Name
SPOTR-PXP

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

I/O

Pin No.

I

2

Signal Name
SPOTR-PXN

I/O
I

C-15

Appendices

3

C.12

Apx.C Pin Assignments

NC

-

PJ2027 Speaker (Left) connector (2 -pin)
Table C-12 Speaker (Left) connector (2-pin)
Pin No.
1

C-16

Signal Name
SPOTL-PXP

I/O

Pin No.

I

2

Signal Name
SPOTL-PXN

I/O
I

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

Appendix C Pin Assignments

C.13

Appendices

PJ2007 Docking interface connector (240-pin)
Table C-13 Docking interface connector (240-pin) (1/4)
Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

1

DCOUT

-

2

DCOUT

-

3

DOCDT1-S3N

O

4

IF-P5V

-

5

MOUSCK-P5P

I/O

6

EXKBCK-P5P

I/O

7

GND

-

8

PHYRST-E3N

O

9

DPCCONF-S5P

O

10

GND

-

11

GND

-

12

DDCSCL-P5P

I/O

13

DRED-PXP

O

14

DGREEN-PXP

O

15

DBLUE-PXP

O

16

DVSYNC-P5P

O

17

DVISCL-P5P

I/O

18

NC

-

19

GND

-

20

NC

-

21

NC

-

22

DVITX2-P3P

O

23

DVITX2-P3N

O

24

DVITX1-P3P

O

25

DVITX1-P3N

O

26

DVITX0-P3P

O

27

DVITX0-P3N

O

28

GND

-

29

GND

-

30

DVITXC-P3P

O

31

DVITXC-P3N

O

32

DVIDET-S3N

O

33

NC

-

34

NC

-

35

NC

-

36

NC

-

37

GND

-

38

NC

-

39

NC

-

40

NC

-

41

GND

-

42

NC

-

43

NC

-

44

NC

-

45

GND

-

46

NC

-

47

NC

-

48

NC

-

49

GND

-

50

NC

-

51

NC

-

52

NC

-

53

Not Mount

-

54

Not Mount

-

55

BIDDP-EXP

O

56

BIDDN-EXN

O

57

Not Mount

-

58

Not Mount

-

59

MDMRNG-B3P

I/O

60

MDMTIP-B3P

61

DCOUT

-

62

DCOUT

-

63

EJCTRQ-S3N

I/O

64

IF-P5V

-

65

MOUSDT-P5P

I/O

66

EXKBDT-P5P

67

GND

-

68

GND

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

I/O

I/O
-

C-17

Appendices

Apx.C Pin Assignments

69

DILSON-E3P

O

70

NC

71

GND

-

72

DDCSDA -P5P

73

GND

-

74

GND

I/O
-

Table C-13 Docking interface connector (240-pin) (2/4)
Pin No.

C-18

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

-

76

DHSYNC-P5P

I

I/O

78

NC

-

75

GND

77

DVISDA-P5P

79

GND

-

80

NC

-

81

NC

-

82

NC

-

83

NC

-

84

NC

-

85

NC

-

86

NC

-

87

NC

-

88

GND

-

89

GND

-

90

NC

-

91

NC

-

92

NC

-

93

NC

-

94

NC

-

95

NC

-

96

NC

-

97

GND

-

98

NC

-

99

NC

-

100

NC

-

101

GND

-

102

NC

-

103

NC

-

104

NC

-

105

GND

-

106

NC

-

107

NC

-

108

NC

-

109

GND

-

110

NC

-

111

NC

-

112

NC

-

113

Not Mount

-

114

Not Mount

-

115

BIDCN-EXN

O

116

Not Mount

-

117

BIDCP -EXP

O

118

Not Mount

-

119

Not Mount

-

120

Not Mount

-

121

DCOUT

-

122

DCOUT

-

123

DSSCL-S5P

I/O

124

IF-P5V

-

125

S5V

-

126

DTPA-P3P

I/O

127

GND

-

128

DTPB-P3P

I/O

129

USBON1-E5N

I

130

USBOC1-S3N

I

131

GND

-

132

USBON2-E5N

I

133

USBOC2-S3N

I

134

SNDMUT-S3N

O

135

NC

-

136

DOUTL-PXP

137

DINL-PXP

O

138

DINR-PXN

O

139

GND

-

140

PWRSW-S3N

O

I

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

Appendix C Pin Assignments

Appendices

141

DCD-PYP

O

142

DSR-PYP

O

143

TXD-PYN

I

144

RING-BYP

O

145

PE-P5P

O

146

PDB07-P5P

I/O

147

PDB06-P5P

I/O

148

GND

149

GND

-

150

PDB04-P5P

I/O

151

PDB01-P5P

I/O

152

PDB02-P5P

I/O

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

-

C-19

Appendices

Apx.C Pin Assignments

Table C-13 Docking interface connector (240-pin) (3/4)
Pin No.

C-20

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

I/O

154

STROB-P5N

I

153

PDB00-P5P

155

NC

-

156

NC

-

157

GND

-

158

NC

-

159

NC

-

160

NC

-

161

GND

-

162

NC

-

163

NC

-

164

NC

-

165

GND

-

166

NC

-

167

NC

-

168

NC

-

169

GND

-

170

NC

-

171

NC

-

172

NC

-

173

GND

-

174

Not Mount

-

175

LAN-E3V

-

176

Not Mount

-

177

Not Mount

-

178

NC

-

179

BIDAP-EXP

O

180

BIDAN-EXN

O

181

DCOUT

-

182

DCOUT

-

183

DSSDA -S5P

I/O

184

IF-P5V

-

185

NC

-

186

DTPA-P3N

I/O

187

GND

-

188

DTPB-P3N

I/O

189

USBP2-E3P

I/O

190

USBP2-E3N

I/O

191

GND

-

192

USBP3-E3P

I/O

193

USBP3-E3N

I/O

194

DOUTR-PXP

I

195

DOUTR-PXN

I

196

DOUTL-PXN

I

197

DINL-PXN

I

198

DINR-PXP

I

199

GND

-

200

RXD-PYN

O

201

RTS-PYP

I

202

CTS-PYP

O

203

DTR-PYP

I

204

SELCT-P5P

O

205

BUSY-P5P

O

206

ACK -P5N

O

207

PDB05-P5P

I/O

208

GND

-

209

GND

-

210

PDB03-P5P

211

SLIN-P5N

I

212

PINIT-P5N

I

213

ERROR-P5N

O

214

AUTFD-P5N

I

215

NC

-

216

NC

-

217

GND

-

218

NC

-

219

NC

-

220

NC

-

221

GND

-

222

NC

-

223

NC

-

224

NC

-

I/O

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

Appendix C Pin Assignments

Appendices

225

GND

-

226

NC

-

227

NC

-

228

NC

-

229

GND

-

230

NC

-

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

C-21

Appendices

Apx.C Pin Assignments

Table C-13 Docking interface connector (240-pin) (4/4)
Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

231

NC

-

232

NC

-

233

GND

-

234

ACT-E3N

O

235

LINK-E3N

O

236

DOCDT2-S3N

O

237

Not Mount

-

238

Not Mount

-

239

BIDBP-EXP

O

240

BIDBN-EXN

O

C.14

PJ2015 Mini PCI interface connector (124-pin)
Table C-14 Mini PCI interface connector (124-pin) (1/2)
Pin No.

C-22

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

1

NC

-

2

NC

-

3

NC

-

4

NC

-

5

NC

-

6

NC

-

7

NC

-

8

NC

-

9

NC

-

10

NC

-

11

NC

-

12

NC

-

13

WLON-S3N

O

14

NC

-

15

GND

-

16

NC

-

17

PIRQA-P3N

I

18

P5V

-

19

P3V

-

20

PIRQD-P3N

I

21

NC

-

22

NC

-

23

GND

-

24

B3V

-

25

X33MPC-P3P

I

26

PCIRST-S3N

O

27

GND

-

28

P3V

-

29

PREQ2-P3N

O

30

PGNT2-P3N

I

31

P3V

-

32

GND

-

33

AD31-P3P

I/O

34

PME-S3N

35

AD29-P3P

I/O

36

NC

37

GND

-

38

AD30-P3P

39

AD27-P3P

I/O

40

P3V

41

AD25-P3P

I/O

42

AD28-P3P

I/O

43

NC

-

44

AD26-P3P

I/O

45

CBE3-P3N

I/O

46

AD24-P3P

I/O

47

AD23-P3P

I/O

48

AD26-P3P

I/O

49

GND

-

50

GND

I/O
I/O
-

-

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

Appendix C Pin Assignments

Appendices

51

AD21-P3P

I/O

52

AD22-P3P

I/O

53

AD19-P3P

I/O

54

AD20-P3P

I/O

55

GND

-

56

PAR-P3P

I/O

Table C-14 Mini PCI interface connector (124-pin) (2/2)
Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

57

AD17-P3P

I/O

58

AD18-P3P

I/O

59

CBE2-P3N

I/O

60

AD16-P3P

I/O

61

IRDY-P3N

I/O

62

GND

63

P3V

-

64

FRAME-P3N

I/O

65

CLKRUN-P3N

I/O

66

TRDY-P3N

I/O

67

SERR-P3N

I

68

STOP-P3N

I/O

69

GND

-

70

P3V

71

PERR-P3N

I/O

72

DEVSEL-P3N

73

CBE1-P3N

I/O

74

GND

75

AD14-P3P

I/O

76

AD15-P3P

I/O

77

GND

-

78

AD13-P3P

I/O

79

AD12-P3P

I/O

80

AD11-P3P

I/O

81

AD10-P3P

I/O

82

GND

83

GND

-

84

AD09-P3P

I/O

85

AD08-P3P

I/O

86

CBE0-P3N

I/O

87

AD07-P3P

I/O

88

P3V

89

P3V

-

90

AD06-P3P

I/O

91

AD05-P3P

I/O

92

AD04-P3P

I/O

93

NC

-

94

AD02-P3P

I/O

95

AD03-P3P

I/O

96

AD00-P3P

I/O

97

P5V

-

98

NC

-

99

AD01-P3P

I/O

100

NC

-

101

GND

-

102

GND

-

103

NC

-

104

GND

-

105

NC

-

106

NC

-

107

NC

-

108

NC

-

109

NC

-

110

NC

-

111

NC

-

112

NC

-

113

GND

-

114

GND

-

115

NC

-

116

NC

-

117

GND

-

118

NC

-

119

GND

-

120

GND

-

121

NC

-

122

NC

-

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

-

I/O
-

-

-

C-23

Appendices

123

C-24

Apx.C Pin Assignments

NC

-

124

B3V

-

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

Appendix C Pin Assignments

C.15

Appendices

PJ2017 MDC1 interface connector (30-pin)
Table C-15 MDC1 interface connector (30-pin)
Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

1

NC

-

2

GND

-

3

GND

-

4

PHONE-BXN

I

5

NC

-

6

NC

-

7

NC

-

8

GND

-

9

NC

-

10

NC

-

11

NC

-

12

NC

-

13

NC

-

14

NC

-

15

GND

-

16

MDC-B3V

-

17

B3V

-

18

NC

-

19

GND

-

20

GND

-

21

NC

-

22

M97SY2-B3P

O

23

M97OT2 -P3P

O

24

NC

-

25

M97RS2-S3N

O

26

M97IN2-B3P

O

27

GND

-

28

GND

-

29

GND

-

30

X97BC2-P3P

O

C.16

PJ1003 MDC2 interface connector (2 -pin)
Table C-16 MDC2 interface connector (2-pin)
Pin No.
1

C.17

Signal Name
MDMTIP-B3P

I/O

Pin No.

I/O

2

Signal Name
MDMRNG-B3P

I/O
I/O

PJ2019 Serial interface connector (9 -pin)
Table C-17 Serial interface connector (9-pin)
Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

1

DCD-PYP

I

2

RXD-PYN

I

3

TXD-PYN

O

4

DTR-PYP

O

5

GND

-

6

DSR-PYP

I

7

RTS-PYP

O

8

CTS-PYP

I

9

RING-BYP

I

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

C-25

Appendices

C.18

Apx.C Pin Assignments

PJ2020 Parallel interface connector (25-pin)
Table C-18 Parallel interface connector (25-pin)
Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

1

STROB-P5N

O

2

PDB00-P5P

I/O

3

PDB01-P5P

I/O

4

PDB02-P5P

I/O

5

PDB03-P5P

I/O

6

PDB04-P5P

I/O

7

PDB05-P5P

I/O

8

PDB06-P5P

I/O

9

PDB07-P5P

I/O

10

ACK -P5N

I

11

BUSY-P5P

I

12

PE-P5P

I

13

SELCT-P5P

I

14

AUTFD-P5N

O

15

ERROR-P5N

I

16

PINIT-P5N

O

17

SLIN-P5N

O

18

GND

-

19

GND

-

20

GND

-

21

GND

-

22

GND

-

23

GND

-

24

GND

-

25

GND

-

C.19

PJ2033 USB0 interface connector (4-pin)
Table C-19 USB0 interface connector (4-pin)
Pin No.

Signal Name

1

USBOPS-E5V

3

USB0-E3P

C.20

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I

2

USBP0-E3N

I/O

4

GND

I/O
I/O
-

PJ2034 USB1 interface connector (4-pin)
Table C-20 USB1 interface connector (4-pin)
Pin No.

Signal Name

1

USBOPS-E5V

3

USBP1-E3P

C.21

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I

2

USBP1-E3N

I/O

4

GND

I/O
I/O
-

PJ1004 USB board interface connector (6-pin)
Table C-21 USB board interface connector (6-pin)
Pin No.
1

C-26

Signal Name
USB1PS-E5V

I/O

Pin No.

I

2

Signal Name
USB1PS-E5V

I/O
I

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

Appendix C Pin Assignments

3

USBP4-E3N

5

GND

C.22

Appendices

I/O

4

USBP4-E3P

-

6

GND

I/O
-

PJ4900 Bluetooth interface connector (20-pin)
Table C-22 Bluetooth interface connector (20-pin)
Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

1

GND

-

2

NC

-

3

BTMDL-P3N

O

4

NC

-

5

NC

-

6

NC

-

7

NC

-

8

BTRST-S3P

I

9

NC

-

10

NC

-

11

GND

-

12

NC

-

13

BTIFOF-S3N

O

14

NC

-

15

NC

-

16

USBP5-E3P

17

USBP5-E3N

I/O

18

NC

-

10

NC

-

20

BT-P3V

-

C.23

I/O

PJ1100 Sound board interface connector (30-pin)
Table C-23 Sound board interface connector (30-pin)
Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

1

A-GND

-

2

GND

-

3

LOUTL-PXP

O

4

GND

-

5

LOUTR-PXP

O

6

IRRX-P3N

O

7

A-GND

-

8

IRTX-P3P

I

9

HPOUTL-PXP

I

10

P3V

-

11

HPOUTR-PXP

I

12

P3V

-

13

A-GND

-

14

IRMODE-P3P

15

MICIN-PXP

O

16

GND

-

17

A-GND

-

18

GND

-

19

AGCL-PXP

O

20

BTSWON-S3P

O

21

AGCR-PXP

O

22

SV3

-

23

VREF1-P2V

-

24

SND-P5V

-

25

A4R7-P4V

-

26

SNDMUT-S3N

I

27

A4R7-P4V

-

28

SPKEN-P5P

I

29

A4R7-P4V

-

30

A-GND

-

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

I/O

C-27

Appendices

C.24

Apx.C Pin Assignments

PJ651 IEEE 1394 interface connector
Table C-24 IEEE 1394 interface connector
Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

1

TPB0-P3N

I/O

2

TPB0-P3P

I/O

3

TPA0-P3N

I/O

4

TPA0-P3P

I/O

C.25

PJ4500 LAN interface connector (14-pin)
Table C-25 LAN interface connector (14-pin)
Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

A1

BIDAP-EXP

O

A2

BIDAN-EXN

O

A3

BIDBP-EXP

I

A4

BIDCP-EXP

I

A5

BIDCN-EXN

I

A6

BIDBN-EXN

I

A7

BIDDP -EXP

O

A8

BIDDN-EXN

O

A9

ACT-E3N

I

A10

LAN-E3V

-

A11

LINK-E3N

I

A12

LAN-E3V

-

B1

MDMTIP-B3P

I/O

B2

MDMRNG-B3P

C.26

I/O

PJ8800 DC-IN connector (4-pin)
Table C-26 DC-IN connector (4-pin)
Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

1

GND

-

2

GND

-

3

ADPDC

-

4

ADPDC

-

C.27

PJ8810 1st Battery connector (10-pin)
Table C -27 1st Battery connector (10-pin)
Pin No.

C-28

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

1

PVBL1

-

2

BTMP1

I

3

DCHG

-

4

M5V

-

5

PSCL-S5P

I/O

6

PSDA-S5P

7

GND

-

8

DBT10V-S5N

I

9

GND

-

10

PVBL1

-

I/O

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

Appendix C Pin Assignments

C.28

Appendices

PJ1005 RTC Battery connector (2-pin)
Table C-28 RTC Battery connector (2-pin)
Pin No.
1

C.29

Signal Name
ZS-PWCHKF

I/O

Pin No.

-

2

Signal Name
GND

I/O
-

PJ8770 FAN interface connector (3-pin)
Table C-29 FAN interface connector (3-pin)
Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.
2

1

P5V

-

3

FANG-P3P

O

C.30

Signal Name
GND

I/O
-

PJ5500 LCD interface connector (41-pin)
Table C-30 LCD interface connector (41-pin)
Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

1

PNL-P3V

-

2

PNL-P3V

-

3

PNL2-P3P

I

4

GND

-

5

GND

-

6

PNL1-P3P

I

7

GND

-

8

GND

-

9

TB2-P3N

O

10

TB2-P3P

O

11

GND

-

12

TCLK2-P3N

O

13

TCLK2-P3P

O

14

GND

-

15

TC2-P3N

O

16

TC2-P3P

O

17

GND

-

18

TA2-P3N

O

19

TA2-P3P

O

20

GND

-

21

TC1-P3N

O

22

TC1-P3P

O

23

GND

-

24

TCLK1-P3N

O

25

TCLK1-P3P

O

26

GND

-

27

TA1-P3N

O

28

TA1-P3P

O

29

GND

-

30

TB1-P3N

O

31

TB1-P3P

O

32

GND

-

33

BRT0-P5P

O

34

BRT1-P5P

O

35

BRT2DA -S3P

O

36

GND

-

37

GND

-

38

PNL0-P3P

I

39

FL-P5V

-

40

FL-P5V

-

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

C-29

Appendices

41

C-30

Apx.C Pin Assignments

FL-P5V

-

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

Appendix C Pin Assignments

C.31

Appendices

PJ5523 CRT interface connector (15-pin)
Table C-31 CRT interface connector (15-pin)
Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

1

RED-PXP

O

2

GREEN-PXP

O

3

BLUE-PXP

O

4

NC

-

5

GND

-

6

GND

-

7

GND

-

8

GND

-

9

P5V

-

10

GND

-

11

NC

-

12

CRTSCL-P5P

I/O

13

SHSYNC-P5P

O

14

SVSYNC-P5P

O

15

CRTSDA -P5P

I/O

C.32

PJ5501 TV connector (4-pin)
Table C-32 TV connector (4-pin)
Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

1

TVLUMA-PXP

I

2

TVCHRO-PXP

I

3

GND

-

4

GND

-

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

C-31

Appendices

Apx.C Pin Assignments

Sound Board
C.33

PJ3000 System board interface connector (30-pin)
Table C-33 System board interface connector (30-pin)
Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

1

A-GND

-

2

FIR-GND

-

3

LOUTL -PXP

O

4

FIR-GND

-

5

LOUTR -PXP

O

6

IRRX-P3N

O

7

A-GND

-

8

IRTX-P3P

I

9

HPOUTL-PXP

O

10

P3V

-

11

HPOUTR-PXP

O

12

P3V

-

13

A-GND

-

14

IRMODE-P3P

I

15

MICIN-PXP

O

16

GND

-

17

A-GND

-

18

GND

-

19

AGCL-PXP

I

20

BTSWON-S3P

O

21

AGCR-PXP

I

22

S3V

-

23

VREF1-P2V

-

24

SND-P5V

-

25

A4R7-P4V

-

26

SNDMUT-S3N

O

27

A4R7-P4V

-

28

SPKEN-P5P

O

29

A4R7-P4V

-

30

A-GND

-

C.34

PJ3001 Internal Microphone connector (2-pin)
Table C-34 Internal Microphone connector (2-pin)
Pin No.
1

C.35

Signal Name
VREF1-P2V

I/O

Pin No.

I

2

Signal Name
A-GND

I/O
-

PJ3002 External Microphone connector (6-pin)
Table C-35 External Microphone connector (6-pin)
Pin No.

C-32

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

1

A-GND

-

2

MICIN-PXP

I

3

VREF1-P2V

I

4

NC

-

5

NC

-

6

MICIN-PXP

I

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

Appendix C Pin Assignments

C.36

Appendices

PJ3003 Headphone connector (6-pin)
Table C-36 Headphone connector (6-pin)
Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

1

A-GND

-

2

HEADL-PXP

O

3

HEADR-PXP

O

4

A-GND

-

5

SPKEN-P5P

I

6

NC

-

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

C-33

Appendices

Apx.C Pin Assignments

LED Board
C.37

PJ3100 System board interface connector (14-pin)
Table C-37 System board interface connector (14-pin)
Pin No.

C-34

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

1

GND

-

2

BTLED-S3P

I

3

HDDLED-P5P

I

4

P5V

-

5

BAT2GR-S5N

I

6

BAT20R-S5N

I

7

BAT1GR-S5N

I

8

BAT10R-S5N

I

9

DCINGR-S5N

I

10

DCINOR-S5N

I

11

M5V

-

12

PWLEGR-S3P

I

13

PWLEOR-S3P

I

14

E5V

-

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

Appendix C Pin Assignments

Appendices

Sensor/Switch Board
C.38

PJ3200 System board interface connector (10-pin)
Table C-38 System board interface connector (10-pin)
Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

1

GND

-

2

NC

3

NC

-

4

KBRT03-S3N

I/O

5

KBRT00-S3N

I/O

6

KBSC16-S3N

I/O

7

PNLOFF-S3N

O

8

NC

-

9

ILUOUT-PXP

O

10

P3V

-

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

-

C-35

Appendices

Apx.C Pin Assignments

USB Board
C.39

PJ3300 System board interface connector (6-pin)
Table C-39 System board interface connector (6-pin)
Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

1

GND

-

2

GND

-

3

Not Mount

-

4

Not Mount

-

5

GND

-

6

GND

-

C.40

PJ3301 USB port 2 connector (4-pin)
Table C-40 USB port 2 connector (4-pin)
Pin No.

C-36

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

1

GND

-

2

Not Mount

-

3

Not Mount

-

4

GND

-

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

Appendix C Pin Assignments

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

Appendices

C-37

Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes
Appendix D

Appendix D

Keyboard Scan/Character Codes
Table D-1 Scan codes (set 1 and set 2) (1/4)

Cap

Keytop

No.

Code set 1

Code set 2

Make

Break

Make

Note

Break

01

‘ ~

29

A9

0E

F0

0E

02

1 !

02

82

16

F0

16

03

2 @

03

83

1E

F0

1E

04

3 #

04

84

26

F0

26

05

4 $

05

85

25

F0

25

06

5 %

06

86

2E

F0

2E

07

6 ^

07

87

36

F0

36

08

7 &

08

88

3D

F0

3D

*2

09

8 *

09

89

3E

F0

3E

*2

10

9 (

0A

8A

46

F0

46

*2

11

0 )

0B

8B

45

F0

45

12

- _

0C

8C

4E

F0

4E

13

= +

0D

8D

55

F0

55

15

BkSp

0E

8E

66

F0

66

16

Tab

0F

8F

0D

F0

0D

17

Q

10

90

15

F0

15

18

W

11

91

1D

F0

1D

19

E

12

92

24

F0

24

20

R

13

93

2D

F0

2D

21

T

14

94

2C

F0

2C

22

Y

15

95

35

F0

35

23

U

16

96

3C

F0

3C

*2

24

I

17

97

43

F0

43

*2

25

O

13

98

44

F0

44

*2

26

P

19

99

4D

F0

4D

*2

27

[ {

1A

9A

54

F0

54

28

] }

1B

9B

5B

F0

5B

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

D-1

Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes

Table D-1 Scan codes (set 1 and set 2) (2/4)
Cap
No.

D-2

Keytop

Code set 1

Code set 2

Make

Break

Make

Note

Break

29

\ |

2B

AB

5D

F0

5D

*5

30

Caps Lock

3A

BA

58

F0

58

31

A

1E

9E

1C

F0

1C

32

S

1F

9F

1B

F0

1B

33

D

20

A0

23

F0

23

34

F

21

A1

2B

F0

2B

35

G

22

A2

34

F0

34

36

H

23

A3

33

F0

33

37

J

24

A4

3B

F0

3B

*2

38

K

25

A5

42

F0

42

*2

39

L

26

A6

4B

F0

4B

*2

40

; :

27

A7

4C

F0

4C

*2

41

‘ “

28

A8

52

F0

52

43

Enter

1C

9C

5A

F0

5A

44

Shift (L)

2A

AA

12

F0

12

45

No.102
key

56

D6

61

F0

61

46

Z

2C

AC

1A

F0

1A

47

X

2D

AD

22

F0

22

48

C

2E

AE

21

F0

21

49

V

2F

AF

2A

F0

2A

50

B

30

B0

32

F0

32

51

N

31

B1

31

F0

31

52

M

32

B2

3A

F0

3A

*2

53

, <

33

B3

41

F0

41

*2

54

. >

34

B4

49

F0

49

*2

55

/ ?

35

B5

4A

F0

4A

*2

57

Shift (R)

36

B6

59

F0

59

*3

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes

Table D-1 Scan codes (set 1 and set 2) (3/4)
Cap
No.

Keytop

58

Code set 1

Code set 2

Note

Make

Break

Make

Ctrl

1D

9D

14

F0

14

*3

60

Alt (L)

38

B8

11

F0

11

*3

61

Space

39

B9

29

F0

29

62

ALT (R)

E0

38

E0

B8

E0

11

E0

F0

11

75

Ins

E0

52

E0

D2

E0

70

E0

F0

70

*1

76

Del

E0

53

E0

D3

E0

71

E0

F0

71

*1

79

←

E0

4B

E0

CB

E0

6B

E0

F0

6B

*1

80

Home

E0

47

E0

C7

E0

6C

E0

F0

6C

*1

81

End

E0

4F

E0

CF

E0

69

E0

F0

69

*1

83

↑

E0

48

E0

C8

E0

75

E0

F0

75

*1

84

↓

E0

50

E0

D0

E0

72

E0

F0

72

*1

85

PgUp

E0

49

E0

C9

E0

7D

E0

F0

7D

*1

86

PgDn

E0

51

E0

D1

E0

7A

E0

F0

7A

*1

89

→

E0

4D

E0

CD

E0

74

E0

F0

74

*1

110

Esc

01

81

76

F0

76

112

F1

3B

BB

05

F0

05

113

F2

3C

BC

06

F0

06

114

F3

3D

BD

04

F0

04

115

F4

3E

BE

0C

F0

0C

116

F5

3F

BF

03

F0

03

117

F6

40

C0

0B

F0

0B

118

F7

41

C1

83

F0

83

119

F8

42

C2

0A

F0

0A

120

F9

43

C3

01

F0

01

121

F10

44

C4

09

F0

09

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

Break

*3

D-3

Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes

Table D-1 Scan codes (set 1 and set 2) (4/4)
Cap

Code set 1

Keytop

No.

Make

Code se t 2

Break

Make

Note

Break

122

F11

57

D7

78

F0

78

*3

123

F12

58

D8

07

F0

07

*3

124

PrintSc

*6

*6

*6

*6

*6

126

Pause

*7

*7

*7

*7

*7

202

Fn

—

—

—

—

*4

203

Win

E0

5B

E0

DB

E0

1F

E0

F0

1F

204

App

E0

5D

E0

DD

E0

2F

E0

F0

2F

Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

D-4

*
*
*
*
*
*
*

Scan codes differ by mode.
Scan codes differ by overlay function.
Combined with the Fn key makes different codes.
Fn key does not generate a code by itself.
This key corresponds to key No. 42 in a 102-key model.
Refer to Table D-6, No. 124 key scan code.
Refer to Table D-7, No. 126 key scan code.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes

Table D-2 Scan codes with left Shift key
Cap

Key

No.

top

55

/

E0

AA E0 35 E0 B5 E0 2A E0 F0

12

E0

4A E0 F0

4A E0 12

75

INS

E0

AA E0 52 E0 D2 E0 2A E0 F0

12

E0

70 E0 F0

70

E0 12

76

DEL

E0

AA E0 53 E0 D3 E0 2A E0 F0

12

E0

71 E0 F0

71

E0 12

79

←

E0

AA E0 4B E0 CB E0 2A E0 F0

12

E0

6B E0 F0

6B E0 12

Home E0

AA E0 47 E0 C7 E0 2A E0 F0

12

E0 6C E0 F0 6C E0 12

80

Code set 1
Make

Code set 2
Break

Make

Break

81

End

E0

AA E0 4F E0 CF E0 2A E0 F0

12

E0

69 E0 F0

69

E0 12

83

↑

E0

AA E0 48 E0 C8 E0 2A E0 F0

12

E0

75 E0 F0

75

E0 12

84

↓

E0

AA E0 50 E0 D0 E0 2A E0 F0

12

E0

72 E0 F0

72

E0 12

85

PgUp

E0

AA E0 49 E0 C9 E0 2A E0 F0

12

E0 7D E0 F0 7D E0 12

86

PgDn

E0

AA E0 51 E0 D1 E0 2A E0 F0

12

E0

7A E0 F0

7A E0 12

89

→

E0

AA E0 4D E0 CD E0 2A E0 F0

12

E0

74 E0 F0

74

E0 12

203

Win

E0

AA E0 5B E0 DB E0 2A E0 F0

12

E0

1F E0 F0

1F

E0 12

204

App

E0

AA E0 5D E0 DD E0 2A E0 F0

12

E0

2F E0 F0

2F

E0 12

Note : The table above shows scan codes with the left Shift key. In combination with the right
Shift key, scan codes are changed as listed below:
Set 1
Set 2

With left Shift
With right Shift
E0 AA____________E0 B6
E0 2A ____________E0 36
E0 F0 12 _________E0 F0 59
E0 12 ____________E0 59

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

D-5

Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes

Table D-3 Scan codes in Numlock mode
Cap

Key

Code set 1

No.

top

75

INS

E0

2A

E0 52

E0 D2 E0

AA E0 12 E0

70 E0

F0

70

E0 F0

12

76

DEL

E0

2A

E0 53

E0 D3 E0

AA E0 12 E0

71 E0

F0

71

E0 F0

12

79

←

E0

2A

E0 4B E0 CB E0

AA E0 12 E0 6B E0

F0

6B E0 F0

12

80

Home

E0

2A

E0 47

E0 C7 E0

AA E0 12 E0 6C E0

F0

6C E0 F0

12

81

End

E0

2A

E0 4F

E0 CF E0

AA E0 12 E0

69 E0

F0

69

E0 F0

12

83

↑

E0

2A

E0 48

E0 C8 E0

AA E0 12 E0

75 E0

F0

75

E0 F0

12

84

↓

E0

2A

E0 50

E0 D0 E0

AA E0 12 E0

72 E0

F0

72

E0 F0

12

85

PgUp

E0

2A

E0 49

E0 C9 E0

AA E0 12 E0 7D E0

F0

7D E0 F0

12

86

PgDn

E0

2A

E0 51

E0 D1 E0

AA E0 12 E0

7A E0

F0

7A E0 F0

12

89

→

E0

2A

E0 4D E0 CD E0

AA E0 12 E0

74 E0

F0

74

E0 F0

12

203

Win

E0

2A

E0 5B E0 DB E0

AA E0 12 E0

1F E0

F0

1F

E0 F0

12

204

App

E0

2A

E0 5D E0 DD E0

AA E0 12 E0

2F E0

F0

2F

E0 F0

12

Make

Code set 2
Break

Make

Break

Table D-4 Scan codes with Fn key
Cap

D-6

Code set 1
Make

Code set 2

No.

Keytop

Break

Make

Break

43

ENT

E0

1C

E0

9C

E0

5A

E0

F0

5A

58

CTRL

E0

1D

E0

9D

E0

14

E0

F0

14

60

LALT

E0

38

E0

B8

E0

11

E0

F0

11

121

ARROW

45

C5

77

F0

77

122

NUMERIC

45

C5

77

F0

77

123

Scrl

46

C5

7E

F0

7E

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes

Table D-5 Scan codes in overlay mode
Cap

Code set 1

Keytop

No.

Code set 2

Make

Break

Make

Break

09

8

(8)

48

C8

75

F0

75

10

9

(9)

49

C9

7D

F0

7D

11

0

(*)

37

B7

7C

F0

7C

23

U

(4)

4B

CB

6B

F0

6B

24

I

(5)

4C

CC

73

F0

73

25

O

(6)

4D

CD

74

F0

74

26

P

(–)

4A

CA

7B

F0

7B

37

J

(1)

4F

CF

69

F0

69

38

K

(2)

50

D0

72

F0

72

39

L

(3)

51

D1

7A

F0

7A

40

;

(+)

4E

CE

79

F0

79

52

M

(0)

52

D2

70

F0

70

54

.

(.)

53

D3

71

F0

71

55

/

(/)

E0

35

E0

B5

40

4A

E0

F0

4A

Table D-6 No.124 key scan code
Key
top
Prt Sc

Code set 1

Shift

Code set 2

Make
Common

2A

E0

Ctrl +

E0

Shift +

E0

Alt +

E0

Break
37

E0

B7

E0

37

E0

37

E0

54

D4

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

Make
AA

E0

12

E0

B7

E0

B7

E0

Break
7C

E0 F0

7C

E0

7C

E0

F0

7C

7C

E0

F0

7C

84

F0

B4

F0

12

D-7

Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes

Table D-7 No.126 key scan code
Key
top

Shift

Code set 1

Code set 2

Make

Make

Pause

Common*

E1

1D

45

E1

Ctrl*

E0

46

E0

C6

9D

C5

E1

14

77

E1

F0

E0

7E

E0

F0

7E

14

F0

77

*: This key generates only make codes.

D-8

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

Appendix E Key Layout

Appendices

Appendix E

Appendix E
E.1

Key Layout

United Kingdom (UK) Keyboard

Figure E-1 UK keyboard

E.2

United States (US) Keyboard

Figure E-2 US keyboard

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

E-1

Appendices

E-2

Appendix E Key Layout

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

Appendix F Wiring Diagrams

Appendices

Appendix F

Appendix F
F.1

Wiring Diagrams

Parallel Port Wraparound Connector

-SELECT
-PINT

Figure F-1 Parallel port wraparound connector

F.2

Serial Port Wraparound Connector

Figure F-2 Serial port wraparound connector

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

F-1

Appendices

F.3

Appendix F Wiring Diagrams

LAN Loopback Connector
(1) BIBAP (TX+)

(3) BIDBP (RX+)

(2) BIDAN (TX-)

(6) BIDBN (RX-)

Figure F-3 LAN loopback Connector

F-2

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

Appendix G BIOS Rewrite Procedures

Appendices

Appendix G

Appendix G BIOS Rewrite Procedures
This Appendix explains how to rewrite the system BIOS program when you update the system
BIOS.
Tools
To rewrite the BIOS, you need the following tool:
q BIOS/EC/KBC rewriting disk for the computer that has renewed BIOS data.
Rewriting the BIOS
1. Set the system to boot mode.
2. Turn off the power to the computer.
3. Remove the external cable and PC card.
4. Connect an external FDD and insert the BIOS/EC/KBC rewriting disk into either the
external FDD.
5. Turn on the power while holding down the No. 01 key.
For example
(US Keyboard)
(UK Keyboard)
(Keep holding down the key until a message appears on the screen.)
The BIOS rewriting starts.
6. When the process is completed, eject the BIOS/EC/KBC rewriting disk and the system is
automatically reset.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

G-1

Appendices

Appendix G BIOS Rewrite Procedures

G-2

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

Appendix H EC/KBC Rewrite Procedures

Appendices

Appendix H

Appendix H

EC/KBC Rewrite Procedures

This Appendix explains how to rewrite the EC/KBC system program when you update the
EC/KBC system.
Tools
To rewrite the EC/KBC, you need the following tool:
q BIOS/EC/KBC rewriting disk for the computer
Rewriting the EC/KBC
NOTE: 1. Rewrite the EC/KBS only when instructed by a diagnostic disk release
notice.
2. Connect the AC adaptor to the computer when you rewrite the EC/KBC.
3. Do not turn off the power while you are rewriting the EC/KBC.
If the rewrite fails, it might be impossible to start up the computer.
4. If you fail to rewrite EC/KBC, then when you next turn on the power, a
message may be displayed that the contents of the EC/KBC has been erased.
In this case, insert the BIOS/EC/KBC rewriting disk, and the EC/KBC will
be rewritten.
5. Normally it takes about 30 seconds to rewrite the EC/KBC. It may take 3
minutes (maximum), depending on the conditions of the computer or ICs.
The computer is not hung up. Allow sufficient time. Never reboot or turn
off the power to the computer before the rewriting is completed.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Set the system to boot mode.
Turn off the power to the computer.
Remove the external cable and PC Card.
Connect an external FDD and insert the BIOS/EC/KBC rewriting disk into either the
external or built-in FDD.
5. Turn on the power while holding down the Tab key. (Keep holding down the key until a
message appears on the screen.) The BIOS/EC/KBC rewriting starts.
6. When the EC/KBC rewrite is completed, the system is automatically turned off.

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

H-1

Appendices

H-2

Appendix H EC/KBC Rewrite Procedures

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

Appendix I Reliability

Appendices

Appendix I

Appendix I

Reliability

The following table shows MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures).

Table I-1 MTBF
Time (hours)
MTBF

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)

5,336

I-1

Appendices

I-2

Appendix I Reliability

TECRA M1 Maintenance Manual (960-436)



---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : No
Create Date                     : 2003:06:19 14:00:50Z
Modify Date                     : 2003:11:21 11:46:00+11:00
Page Count                      : 426
Creation Date                   : 2003:06:19 14:00:50Z
Author                          : RSantoso
Producer                        : Acrobat PDFWriter 5.0 for Windows NT
Mod Date                        : 2003:11:21 11:46:00+11:00
Metadata Date                   : 2003:11:21 11:46:00+11:00
Title                           : 436m_fr.doc
Creator                         : RSantoso
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools